1/10/2017 <br>

CSC2000 (V2) monitoring system

Engineering and maintenance manuals

The

first Overview
chapter
The
second System
chapter installation
The
third System
chapter configuration
The
fourth Graphics
chapter editing
The
fifth Database
chapter editing
The
sixth Report
chapter maintenance
The Voltage and
seventh automaticpower
reactive
chapter control
The
eighth Integration
five
of
chapter
Nineth IEC61850
part Configuration
tool
The
tenth Automated
chapter testing
Appendix















The first chapter Overview

Directory

1BACKGROUND
2SYSTEM FEATURES AND ARCHITECTURE
2.1GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.2SYSTEM STRUCTURE

3THE CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENT AND APPLICATION OBJECTS

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 1/126
1/10/2017 <br>
3THE CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENT AND APPLICATION OBJECTS

1 Background
CSC2000 Substation automation system ( V2 ) Is a Beijing Quartet Nr automation Corporation (hereinafter referred to as the Quartet
company) summary of years of substation automation system (SAS) Development and engineering application of experience, reference to the
international standards, using the latest technology to design the new substation automation systems. Throughout the system, including
monitoring, remote control and spacer layer protection, measuring and control devices for system monitoring section of this document.
CSC2000 Substation automation system ( V2 ) (Hereinafter V2 System) in 2005 Year 11 Month 12 Through technical appraisal of the Chinese
society for electrical engineering organization , And get a high rating. Appraisal Committee agreed:V2 system monitoring, remote and
spacer layer of protection, measuring and control devices of communication protocols meet the IEC61850 standard can be applied to 750kV
and below a variety of voltage levels of the substation. V2 systems support the IEC61850 standard at the same time, compatible with the
existing standard communication protocols, solve from an existing standard to IEC61850 transition issues, the system has a good opening,
Upgrading existing substation automation devices and systems.

2 System features and architecture

2.1 General characteristics
In addition to generation inherited company CSC2000SAS Hierarchical distributed, object-oriented design concepts and benefits, V2
System also has the following new features:
Monitoring system for multiple operating systems (Windows/UNIX), multiple hardware systems (64 -bit,32 -bit ) of mixed platforms.

Monitoring systems support the IEC61850 standard.

Monitoring system data platform based on integrated voltage and reactive power control (VQC) feature.

Monitor system integrated five-prevention functions, and implements a full set of operation ticket expert system functionality.
Gallery integration design, topological analysis supports dynamic shading.

2.2 System structure

Function modules for telecommunications, AVQC , Design by five-prevention operation using components such as uniform, according to
the different needs of customers, flexible configuration on the computer. 220kV and above high-voltage substation, there are two typical
configuration, full distribution and high level of integration, respectively. Fully distributed manner that distributes applications to
run on different servers, and high integration is mainly used by primary, standby mode your two monitors running on the main station.
Because V2 system support Windows/UNIX mixed-platform, wide distribution, in the operator station using Windows operating systems, and
server used in UNIX operating systems, Running so that is easy to use, and reliability guaranteed. In addition, theV2 system uses highly
configurable hardware platform, ensuring the system in the case of highly integrated, you can still quickly and efficiently complete the
SAS all functions. Because V2 system has good integrity, 110kV and below the substation, in addition to remote control all functions
using a single computer to do this.

2 1CSC2000 ( V2 ) Typical structure of distributed configuration of the system

2 2CSC2000 ( V2 ) Typical structure of systems integration

3 The content of the document and application objects

This document is V2 Version control systems engineering maintenance technical manuals, mostly object-oriented substation monitoring
system maintenance personnel, the Quartet company technical support and engineering staff, but also can be used as a substation, System
Tester, reference materials.
This document is, and supporting the use of Manual: this document is the introduction to system maintenance instructions and system
characteristics, and the manual is mainly for substation operation preparing. If you want to know more about system operation can refer
to the operating instructions.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 2/126
1/10/2017 <br>
to the operating instructions.

The second chapter System installation

Directory

1INSTALLATION AND SETUP OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM
1.1WINDOWSINSTALLATION AND SETUP OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM

1.2UNIXSYSTEM INSTALLATION AND SETUP

1.3FTPINSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION SERVICES

2DATABASE INSTALLATION
2.1MATTERS NEEDING ATTENTION

2.2ORACLEDATABASE INSTALLATION

2.3PGSQLDATABASE INSTALLATION

2.4MSSQLINSTALLATION

3JAVAINSTALLATION
3.1UNIXUNDER THE SYSTEMJAVAINSTALLATION

3.2WINDOWSUNDER THE SYSTEMJAVAINSTALLATION

3.3JAVAADD FONT

4CSC2000(V2) INSTALLATION OF MONITORING SYSTEM

4.1ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE SETTINGS

4.2SCADAINSTALLATION

4.3SCADARELATED ACCESSORIES SET

4.4INSTALLED SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION

4.5MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM OF START AND STOP

5MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM UPGRADES

5.1DATABASE TABLE STRUCTURE CHANGED IN CASE OF UPGRADE

5.2DATABASE TABLE STRUCTURE DOES NOT CHANGE THE CASE OF UPGRADE

5.3THE EXPANSION IN REAL TIME

1 Installation and setup of the operating system

1.1Windows operating system installation and settings
Because Windows System Setup is familiar, and will not repeat them here. For Win2000, you also need to install their own Kit
software, the installation files for the Support/Tools/Setup.exe.

Windows After the installation is complete is in need of attention, host name and A Network card IP Address corresponds to. For
example: a monitoring host and host name:SCADA, network card IP:192.168.1.1,B network card IP: 192.168.2.1, then "pingSCADA" command should
display the connect 192.168.1.1. If not, will affect the installation of the monitoring system. Should be modified as follows (with
WindowsXP as an example):
1. in " network connections " , enter " Advanced " Xia " Advanced settings "

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 3/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 1

2. adjustments in the advanced settings for each connection. NET should be in front,b nets in the post.

1 2

1.2Unix system installation and Setup

1.2.1 Solaris8forSparc systems installation

Installation steps are as follows:

1. already running system or reinstall the system type the stop+a(stop key for SUN keyboard special keys ) into the OK State.
Introductions:
1, type boot Restart computer, during normal operation, use the normal shutdown startup key, avoid using this word, function
correctly when you use this command, to below the root permissions;
2, type boot cdrom inserted Unix first installation disc, automatic restart, start the installation system;
3, andOK State unable to quit just type boot reboot machine;
4, when running into OK status command init 0.
After about 7 minutes to the next step.

2. Select interface language, select the language for the entire system, this step 6, that is, Chinese Simplified.

3. the next step is to Select a Locale . Select "Simplified Chinese EUC locale (zh)", or "Simplified Chinese EUC locale/GBK" , that is 0
or 1.
4. prompt Solaris( Unix version ) Setup program, choose continue.

5.the identification system, make sure that the network connection.

6. network connectivity.

7. Verify that automatic or manually configure the network.

5-7 step "select all the default

8.the primary network interface: select the erio.

9. fill in the name of the host, such as scada1.

10. fill in the machine's IP address, for example, 192.168.10.10.

9-10 "is the local station in the system status of IP address allocation, only!
11. subnet option ( the default ).

12. subnet mask (255.255.255.0).

13. enable IPV6( whether by default ).

14. appears to confirm that the information that is in front of a few of the options.

15. Configure the network's security policy, and confirm the information.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 4/126
1/10/2017 <br>
16. name service information, select none to continue ( never use a naming service, or is not listed in the table ) and confirm.

17. time zone selection: geographical regions East Asia People's Republic of China modifying the corresponding time and confirm
it.
18. appears Solaris Installer installation: upgrade or initial ( reinstall ) and confirm to continue the installation.

19. Select geographical region: East Asia involves Chinese select all ( including Thai).

20. continue to select the software group, select a complete OEM manufacturing support and distribution ( usually largest ).

21. select disks: when installing for the first time, displayed in the available disk 69994MB, add using the arrow that appears to the
right of the basket, after the second do not need to choose, and continue with the installation.
22. retention of data ( according to their own needs ) choose not to retain continued user Manual layout -the starting
configuration to 73G hard disk, for example: the first:/--2000,/ as the root requires not less than 200MB, secondly:swap swap ,
2000 or 4000, twice the memory ( For example:1G memory configuration for the 2000,2G memory configuration for 4000)and
thirdly:overlap default 69994 ( this cannot be amended, for the actual size of the hard drive that is 73G); the fourth: /Usr-
-5000, this is the system the installation directory; the Fifth:/opt--4000 for the installation directory for the application of the
system; the sixth:/export/home--56981 or 54979 ( free space, associated with the second item ), This is the user's home directory.
Note: in all of the above, and in general contain/ Must be filled in.
23. mount a remote file system , choose to continue install reboot automatically installation estimated time of a quarter of an
hour.
24. set the root user ( root permissions of root ) password:1111.
25. the specified CD/DVD eject the first compact disc, insert the second sheet, and determine ( patches ).

26. install the patch is completed into the next, eject the disc and insert language disk and determine -- initialize -and-ready to
protect continued. Time is about 20 minutes. Eject the disc,Unix systems are installed.

1.2.2 Solaris9forX86 system installation

1.the system or reinstall your system that is already running. Insert a disc, CD.
2. appears Solarisdeviceconfigurationassistant screen, press F2 to continue.

3. appear identifieddevices screen, press F2 to continue.

4. appear bootSolaris screen, use the arrow keys to select CD, press the SPACEBAR or the Enter key to select the item, and press F2 to
continue.
5. choose to install the system, press the number key 1, enter continue. (Default is 1)

6. Select interface language, select the language for the entire system, this step 6, that is, Chinese Simplified.

7. the next step is to SelectaLocale. Select "SimplifiedChineseGBK"; 2, enter continue.

8. appear kdmconfigintroduction screen, press F2 to continue.

9. appear kdmconfig video card configuration screen, choose changevideodevice/monitor, press F2 to continue. Choose the second entry, the
standard configuration (16colorstandardVGAwithpanning@800*600(256k)), press F2 to continue, select the Multifrequency95hz(upto
1600*1200@75hz)and press F2 to continue, select 21inch,800x600, Press F2 to continue, the system prompt displays correctly, select
Yes.
10. entry identification system the installation interface, select Yes.

11. network connectivity (Yes), and whether to use DHCP, select No and press F2 to continue.

12. fill in the name of the host, such as scada1.

13. fill in the machine's IP address, for example, 192.168.10.10.

14. subnet option ( the default ).

15. subnet mask (255.255.255.0).

16. enable IPV6( whether by default ). Sets the default router (none).

17. appears to confirm that the information that is in front of a few of the options.

18. Configuring network security policy (no)and confirmation (F2).

19. name service information, select none to continue ( never use a naming service, or is not listed in the table ) and confirm.

20. time zone selection: geographic regions Asia People's Republic of China modifying the corresponding time and confirm it.
(F2)

21. appears Solaris interactive installation program installs the way: upgrade (F2) or initial (F4)( that is, install ) And confirm to
continue the installation.
22. Select geographical region: Asia (full option for the Chinese), North America (full option for the English) and confirmation (F2).

23. continue to select the software group, select a complete OEM manufacturing support and distribution ( first item ).

24. select disks: when installing for the first time, displayed in the available disk 39202MB, press F4 to edit, go to edit options,
select Edit the FDISK partition, press F2To confirm, delete the previous partition, create a SOLARIS partition and press F2 to

continue.
25. keep your data ( according to their own needs ) choose not to retain (press F2 continue) continued automatic format files -The
Manual layout file system and disk format (F4) start configuration to 40G hard disk, for example: the first:/--3000,/ As the
root requires not less than 200MB, secondly:swap swap ,512, Twice the memory ( for example:1G memory configuration for the
2000,2G memory configuration for 4000)and thirdly:overlap Default 39202( this cannot be amended, for the actual size of the hard
drive that is 40G); the fourth:/usr--4000, This is the system the installation directory; the Fifth:/opt--2000 for the installation
directory for the application of the system; the sixth:/export/home-- 29685( free space, associated with the second item ), this is
the user's home directory.
Note: in all of the above, and in general contain / Must be filled in.

26. mount a remote file system , choose to continue install reboot automatically installation information, estimated time of a
quarter of an hour. Host will automatically restart after the installation is complete, take the CD out, wait for a few minutes,
the host will start after post.
27. set the root user ( root permissions of root ) password:1111. Twice to confirm.
28. the specified CD/DVD, insert the second disc SOFTWARE(22), and determine. Now have to wait more than half an hour.

29. the installation SOFTWARE(22) finished into the next, eject the disc, and insert the language disk and determine -- to install
it now. Time is about 20 minutes. Eject the disc,Unix systems are installed. Select reboot.

30. install video driver from the CSC2000 substation automation system (V2) CD copy xf864.4.0video.pkg.bz2 App Directory
(/export/home/app), under the app Directory, execute the following command with root privileges:
bunzip2xf864.4.0video.pkg.bz2
pkgadddxf864.4.0video.pkgSUNWxf86uSUNWxf86r

31. install patches from CSC2000 substation automation system (V2) CD copy 9_x86_Recommended.zip to the appHome directory, in the app
Directory, execute the following command with root privileges:
unzip 9_x86_Recommended.zip
cd 9_x86_Recommended
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 5/126
1/10/2017 <br>
cd 9_x86_Recommended
./install_cluster
32. installing Java, in the Release Directory, execute the following command:

java_x86_setup.sh
Involved in the following Setup command refer to part VI of the common set of commands.

1.2.3 Solaris10forSparc/x86 system installation

At present, the Sun New Ultra20 Ultra45 Workstations can be installed Solaris10 The operating system. Solaris10 operating system with
Solaris8, and9 compared with many improvements. A notable change is the SMC(SolarisManagementConsole) completely replaced our common
management tools AdminTool. SMC rely on network cards, but after installing the operating system, we often will reconfigure your network
card to XXX_N mode. This will cause SMC services do not work.

In order to maintain compatibility, when the operating system is installed, we choose non-networked mode , after the installation
of the system, and then add a network card. Ensure SMC 's normal operation.
Also, when users log in for the first time, we choose the common desktop environment (CDE)Environment, as shown in the following
figure.

1 3

solaris10 Xia, at system startup, sometimes network interface card is not up State, affecting the use of network services. To avoid
this from happening. Assuming the host NIC bge0, andbge1. The root user:

1 . vi/etc/rc2d./S99StartNet

2. VI in the window, and the input is shown below, and note the end of the line do not complete.

3 . chmoda+x/etc/rc2d./S99StartNet

So we built a batch program that runs automatically when you boot, ensure the network adapter in up State.

1.2.4 SMC introduces

smc ( SolarisManagementConsole ) Is Solaris Under administrative tools, we used it to manage users, groups of users. SMC must be the root
user to start. When you first start,SMC will take several minutes. Each time you start after very short.

smc Adding users and groups of users, the steps are very simple. First of all in the root users to start SMC command. Then SMC left
navigation tree expand under, select configuration under the users node, and then in the pop-up window, enterrootusername and password.
As shown in the following figure.

1 4

After landing, displays the interface as shown in the following figure.

1 5

In the right window, we need to deal with is two user accounts and groups. Click on icon, enter the user management interface.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 6/126
1/10/2017 <br>
In the right window, we need to deal with is two user accounts and groups. Click on icon, enter the user management interface.
Select any user icon, right floating pop-up menu, select Add user
Wizard. Operation as shown in the following figure

1 6

Our Wizard, and enter the user name, password, and so on. With the AdminTool is different,SMC users adding adding password
complexity restrictions. Such as AdminTool Shi, we can simply set a password for a 3 and SMC password length must be under >=6 , you must
include letters and numbers. Then set a temporary password. Then switch to the root user, use the passwd command resets the app the user
password for the app,OracleUser password for the Oracle. Passwd command usage see the Appendix. In addition, in the home directory
settings window, we default to, and does not need to be changed. As shown in the following figure.

1 7

After the user is created, we need to edit the user account, such as setting user login shell , Home directory, primary group and
secondary group permissions, and so on. App users, for example, double-click the users icon , pop user attributes that interface, as
shown in the following figure.

1 8

Select Home Directory page, edit the main list sharing, open to members of the group, all users read-only access .

1 9

oracle Users, we also need to set the primary group and secondary group Solarisx86 Install, for example. Sets the interface as shown in
the following figure.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 7/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 10

1.3FTP service installation and configuration

Present graphics systems and reports ftp Service implementation file synchronization feature. Windows FTP service is not installed by
default, we need to install it manually. Installation steps are as follows:

1. Unix:FTP services for system services. Csc2000(v2) monitoring system installed path is not /export/home/app/csc2100_home, make sure that
the app path without csc2100_home The file or directory with the same name, establishing a connection are as follows:

ln sDirectroy_Setup/export/home/app/csc2100_home

2. Windows:FTP service is not installed by default, the installation and configuration steps are as follows

A. Insert Windows2k and XP installation CD

B. Click on the Control Panel Add/Remove Programs , pop up Add/Remove Programs window, click on Add/Remove Windowscomponents
Buttons, popup Windows Component Wizard, as shown below:

1 11

C. In the Windows Components window, double-click IIS a bar , pop-up Internet Information service
window (see the following figure), select the last column of the file transfer protocol , and OK when
prompted Select next until the FTP service is installed.

1 12

D. Open the computer management window, expand .

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 8/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 13

E. Right-click , pop-up floating menu, select new new virtual directory. The virtual directory creation wizard, set
up an alias for the csc2100_home, can be written to the virtual directory, the target path for csc2000(v2) monitoring system
installation path. Is created, right-click the virtual directory node, properties dialog box as shown below:

1 14

3. user:app. Password:app. Permissions: administrators. Note: in the " default FTP site properties " in the " security accounts " page not
on the hook , " allow only anonymous connections ", see below.

1 15

2 Database installation
2.1 Matters needing attention
Note: Oracle, and PGSQL and other applicable WIN/UNIX database platform. Host other than for primary and backup servers, whether it
is Windows OS or Unix operating systems, need to install the client.

Note: Model of mixed platforms, either server or client needs to hosts File increase primary and backup servers IP Address and HostName

For example:

Windows : ( File C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts)

192.168.10.10 scada1

192.168.20.10 scada1

192.168.10.20 scada2

192.168.20.20 scada2

Unix : ( File in the/etc/hosts)

192.168.10.10 scada1_1 scada1

192.168.20.10 scada1_2 scada1

192.168.10.20 scada2_1 scada2

192.168.20.20 scada2_2 scada2

2.2 Oracle database installation

OracleforSparc Installation and Oracleforx86 Slightly different installation, the installation Oracleforx86 Please refer to when Oracle
forx86 Database installation Chapters. Installation template file in the issued CD suport Directory.

2.2.1 OracleforSparc database installation

1. restart your computer and root username and password 1111 landing. First configure network system configuration of the network cards need
to change a few files:/etc/hosts,/etc/hostname.*. Hostname.* refers to the network card corresponds to the file* correspond to a different
network adapter. Several network cards have several hostname.* file. For example,Blade2000 station, there are three network cards, the
corresponding file is:hostname.eri0,hostname.hme0,hostname.hme1(Hostname.eri0 is,hostname.hme0,hostname.hme1 to manually add that come
after the system is installed, you can Hostname.eri0 copied to ).
Assuming the workstation hostname is Scada1, typical configuration of the link file:
Hosts file:
#
# Internet host table// using VI Editor
#

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 9/126
1/10/2017 <br>
127.0.0.1 localhost
192.168.10.10 scada1_1 scada1
192.168.20.10 scada1_2 scada1
192.168.30.10 scada1_3 scada1// If there is a third network card
(Note: in this network will be added all the rest, you need to read-only file attribute change)

Hostname.eri0 file is only one line:
Scada1_1// using VI Editor

Hostname.hme0 file is only one line:
Scada1_2// using VI Editor

Hostname.hme1 file is only one line:
Scada1_3// using VI Editor
(Note : Do not have blank lines in the file. Not the last line is not complete)

Note: Please refer to the frequently used commands for common commands set
More content can be used VI modify or using dtpad ( document editing program ) modifications:
VI : exit ": q ( do not save and exit );: q! To exit, you can force change the read-only attribute of the file;: wq ( Save and exit
);: wq! ( Force save and exit ) ;
Quit with changes saved, enter the check;
2. set up an account and enable console in the action bar at the bottom ( must be under root privileges ). The following describes only
the AdminTool account established under. SMC refer under 1.2.4 SMC Introduction section, primary group, oinstall, secondary group
DBA.
Type the command AdminTool, pop user dialog box
a) [ Browse ]-[ user group ], add group DBA and oinstall ([ Edit ]-[ added ])
b) [ Browse ]-[ user ],[ editing ]-[ increase ], increase the user Oracle
Primary group, oinstall
Secondary group DBA
Password - select normal passwords, password fill in Oracle
Home directory - create a home directory paths to fill in /export/home/Oracle/
c) [ Browse ]-[ user ],[ editing ]-[ increase ], increase the user app
Primary group and secondary group not required
Login shell - select other, type /bin/bash
Password - select normal passwords, password fill in the app
Home directory - create a home directory paths to fill in /export/home/app/
3. reboot app user login

4.a copy of the installation files

a) Copy the required template files will be installed on this computer:
First prepare the installation template file for Solaris 8 for Sparc and Solaris 9 for Sparcand issued a CD the installation
template file support/Sparc/oracle_Sparc.zip.
Solaris 10 for Sparcand issued a CD the installation template file support/Sparc/ oracle_Sparc_Sol10.zip
Using FTP tool to copy the template files will be installed on this computer
You can use CuteFTP connected, the user name, password, app,
You can use the FTP command. FTP + the machine's IP address and hit enter;
Type the user name for this machine app and password app
Link is successful, run bin, converted to binary transmission;
Copy using get, upload using put, for example, put d:\xxx.zip or send the source computer d:\xxx.zip computer to a target
machine that is being installed
After copying under root permissions you want to change the read-only attribute.
User name app FTP connection, FTP default directory is /export/home/app/
b) Unzip the file,
A new console , enter the template file directory
Unzip oracle_Sparc_Sol10.zip// Solaris 10 for Sparc , for example, extract the file
5. use the [Exit] to Oracle user logon or reboot to Oracle users
6. continue with the installation need 5 files can be copied from the other machines ( copy method, see note ). The five files
are:profile, and. profileand thesystemand theservices, anddbora Note: the templates copied from another machine, if it is a single
file can be copied directly. If it is a folder within many files must be compressed into zip format ( statements are zip -r) might
otherwise because the storage format of the garbled. Copy end is best to use VI to open it and see.
a) /etc/profile
Solaris 8, and9, you can copy directly from the template file, for Solaris 10, depending on the operating system's escalating,
proposal comparison template files, to be modified.
1) PATH environment variable to join /export/home/Oracle/bin
2) Ensure that the environment variable NLS_LANG ORA_NLS33 set correctly:
NLS_LANG="SIMPLIFIED CHINESE"_CHINA.zhs16cgb231280
ORA_NLS33=$ORACLE_HOME/ocommon/nls/admin/data
b) Oracle home directory (/export/home/Oracle/) of the environment files . profile
This file is a hidden file, you can copy from the template file modified ORACLE_SID, configured as the machine name, as follows:
ORACLE_SID=scada1
Attention ORACLE_SID, used during the installation procedure.
c) /etc/system
At the end of the file add:
set shmsys:shminfo_shmmax= 4294967295
set shmsys:shminfo_shmmin=1
set shmsys:shminfo_shmmni=100

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 10/126
1/10/2017 <br>
set shmsys:shminfo_shmseg=100
set semsys:seminfo_semmni=100
set semsys:seminfo_semmsl=100
set semsys:seminfo_semmns=200
set semsys:seminfo_semopm=100
set semsys:seminfo_semvmx=32767
d) /etc/services

Joined the two lines at the end of the file:

orasrv 1525/tcp oracle
listener 1521/tcp oracle
e) /Etc/init.d/dbora// this file you must modify the ORACLE_SID
Copy this file from the template file modified ORACLE_SID, configured as the machine name,
ORACLE_SID=scada1// you want to modify, and . profile . No more than 8 characters.
(Note : ORACLE_SID . profile aligned behind the file and the installation process)
7. in the root privileges execute the following two commands
a) ln -s /etc/init.d/dbora /etc/rc0.d/K10dbora
b) ln -s /etc/init.d/dbora /etc/rc2.d/S99dbora
8. Insert the Oracle installation disk, reboot the machine ( you must reboot the machine to read the disc ) runs Setup RunInstaller,
follow the prompts to install step by step
Introductions:
a) Must use Oracle login;
b) To set the target install path for the Oracle home directory (/export/home/Oracle/);
c) First time OraHome1 removed. Second in /export/home/ followed by Oracle/.
9. the Unix Group Name is empty, proceed to the next step.
10. a dialog box appears, prompted, run the file /tmp/oralstall/orainstRoot.sh
(Note: before you run Su command under root privileges, use ./+ file name run)
su
1111
cd /tmp/OraInstall
./orainstRoot.sh
11. install-choose Enterprise Edition ( the default ).
12. typical installation installation type-select ( default ).
13. Global Database Name or SID: the machine name.
14. in the Directory for Database Files path specified in /export/home/Oracle/.
15. Summarry Select Installto begin the installation. For about 15 minutes.
16. a dialog box appears , prompted, run the file /export/home/Oracle/root.sh, with 6 steps.
17. Select nextto begin creating database.
18. Oracle installation is complete.
19. when installing for the first time, in the " create database " phase towards the end, if there is some error and warning prompts,
then Oracle needs to be reinstalled. Before reinstalling, you need:
a) Delete /var/opt/Oracle/oratab file
b) In the Oracle home directory (/export/home/Oracle/), Xia, the implementation of rm-r *
c) reboot
d) Repeat [6]-[18] step.
20. copying template file dbstart Oracle bin Directory (/export/home/Oracle/bin) to this machine. Copied from the template file, do not
need to be modified.
21. check the Oracle has started running sqlplus, the user name and password are the system,Manager, if login was successful appears SQL>
prompt, it means that Oracle has been installed successfully.
22. reboot machines, Oracle users log on, repeat (21), if sqlplus Login failed, that Oracle does not start automatically, you need to
check the installation process.
23. Configuring Oracle Services
a) Run netasst;
b) Service name and address configuration Oracle primary and backup servers to 1521.
c) Service name:scada1, address 1: protocols-TCP/IP, hostname-scada1_1, port-1521; address 2: protocols-TCP/IP, hostname- Scada1_2,
port-1521 ( service name, host name, and the name of the server and network configuration )
d) Service name:scada2, address 1: protocols-TCP/IP, hostname-scada2_1, port-1521; address 2: protocols-TCP/IP, hostname- Scada2_2,
port-1521 ( service name, host name with another server and network configuration )
e) To test each service name
f) C. through the " file " menu " save network configuration " to save changes.
Note: If the network cable is disconnected, or the test server is not starting correctly ORACLE Shi , test to spend about 10 minutes.
24. configuration language
a) Running sqlplus;
b) User name and password are the sys,change_on_install. After the SQL> prompt;
c) Type the following command:
SQL>select * from props$;// view configuration , a semicolon must be. There are two needs:
1.NLS_LANGUAGE former AMERICAN into SIMPLIFIED CHINESE
// Modified with the following command
2.NLS_CHARACTERSET original US7ASCII to ZHS16CGB231280
// Modified with the following command
SQL>update props$ set value$='SIMPLIFIED CHINESE' where name='NLS_LANGUAGE'; Don't forget to hit ";
SQL>update props$ set value$='ZHS16CGB231280' where name='NLS_CHARACTERSET';// don't forget to knock ";
// Later confirmed.
SQL>commit; Don't forget to hit ";
SQL>quit
Bash-2.03$>// in order for the new settings to take effect you need to restart Oracle.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 11/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Bash-2.03$>// in order for the new settings to take effect you need to restart Oracle.
bash-2.03$>svrmgrl
SVRMGR>
SVRMGR>connect as sysdba
Username: sys
Password:change_on_install
Connected. Indicates that the connection on the.
SVRMGR>
SVRMGR>shutdown// close the Oracle library
... //There will be some content, the skip.
SVRMGR>startup// restart the Oracle library
... //There will be some content, the skip.
SVRMGR>quit// exit
Bash-2.03$>sqlplus// see if I corrected
Username: sys
Password:change_on_install //
SQL>select * from props$; Look not to mend
Bash-2.03$>oemapp dbastudio// first step select Launch DBA Studio standalong
//Left click on the database name before the+
//Will be prompted to enter a user name and password are: system and Manager.
//Left click Schema
//Left click Table
//Left click SCOTT
//Right-click BONUS selection Table Data Editor ...
// ENAME to write Chinese characters and click "apply", see Chinese character display is normal. As normal, then Oracle is
installed.
// If not normal (Chinese character display ?? ), The 8 step setting has a problem. Back to do it again.
25. change /var/opt/Oracle/oratab last line :scada10:/export/home/oracle:N, N Change Y.
26. configuredOracle installation end

2.2.2 Oracleforx86 database installation

Oracle x86 Environment and Sparc Environment installation procedure essentially similar. With OracleforSPARC differences are as
follows:
1. Oracle users primary group DBA, minor group orainst
2. develop in English environment installed, or the installation process. Language selection EU_US.ISO8859_1USA

3. template file directory is different, do not swap

4. after installation, need template dbstart file replaced $ORACLE_HOME/bin in the dbstart file

5. set the /var/opt/Oracle/oratab file link :

lns/var/opt/oracle/oratab/etc/oratab
6. after installation, in order to use the dbstart and dbshut scripts to start and shut down the database, modify the /var/opt/Oracle/oratab
last line :Scada10:/export/home/oracle:N, n changed to y.

7. after installation, you do not need as in the Sparc configuration language under to enable Oracle adapted to Chinese.

8. in the Oracleforx86 using sqlplus, you need to specify a data source, format:sqlplususer/pass@source

2.3 PGSQL database installation

PostgreSQL Originating from United States University of California, Berkeley, Department of computer science, a database of research
projects Postgres From the first prototype to now,PostgreSQL has developed 15 years ago, new features, new methods are constantly
being added, one of the most important is it to the SQL-92 standard fully supported and extended. Currently,PostgreSQL has left the
school, maintained by the core development team of a global, and embarked on a path of open source.

2.3.1 Windows installPGSQL

2.3.1.1 PGSQL installed

2 1 2 2

2 3

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 12/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 4

2 5

2 6

Program asks whether the user postgres Select the " is ".

2 7

Program tells you the user's password, this password here don't remember.

2 8

User created successfully.

2 9

2 10

The following steps are " Next "

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 13/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 11 2 12

2 13 2 14

2 15

Click Finish End of the installation.

But before the installation of surveillance systems there are a few places that need setting. Setting methods are as follows:
1. in accordance with the following diagram in the start menu to open the "Editpg_hba.conf".

2 16

As shown in the following figure, adding a record in the file, leave the unit IP Tell postgres Note: the IP address is just examples,
practice should submit its own IP address.

2 17

2. in accordance with the following diagram in the start menu to open the "EditPostgreSQL.conf".

1.

Modify postgresql.conf File. "#Client_min_messages=notice" to "client_min_messages=error". Note Remove the preceding "#" . Before and after
the changes see below 2 .

Important note: after you finish this step, in order for the settings to take effect, restart the database service. Restart
method is in the start menu implementation inPostgreSQL8.0-StopServiceandStartservice

2 18 Before the change

2 19 After changes
3. modify the C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc under host files. At the end of the file add this machine's IP address and hostname.

2 20

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 14/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 21

4.in response to the need for table space, you need to assign read and write permissions to the user Postgres. Methods are as follows:
Assuming that monitoring system installation directory D:\csc2100_home Xia, right-click and open the Properties menu.

2 22

ClickThe " Add " button ( If you are unable toThe " Security " page, please see the tips at the end of this section ),

2 23

ClickThe " Advanced " button, as shown below. Click the " find now ",

2 24

Click The " identify " button,

2 25

Select the user you just added"postgres", He added " full control " permissions.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 15/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 26

Tip: If not found in the Properties menu The " Security " page, in the " Tools " , " folder options " can be set. In the " view "
page to remove the " use simple file sharing ( recommended )" option. As described in the following figure

2 27

2.3.1.2 Windows How to uninstall reinstall PGSQL

1 , In the < Control Panel > < Add/Remove Programs > Uninstall PostgreSQL

2 , Find PostgreSQL Installation directory, data Directory after the backup, manually delete the.

3 , Click < My computer > Right-click menu options < Management > , Pop up < Computer management > Delete postgres Users.

4 Install, and follow the steps in the previous section.

2.3.2 Unix install PGSQL

1) Install GUNMake
The purpose of this installation is to install gmake , To install postgres Preparing databases.

1 . Gunzipmake3.80.tar.gz// generates make3.80.tar.tar

2 . Tarxvfmake3.80.tar.tar// make3.80 Directory

3 . cdmake3.80

4 . . /configure

5 . /usr/local/bin/make

6 . Su// super user login

7 . Enter the password

8 . /usr/local/bin/makeinstall

Final installation location is displayed, the next step will be used. /Usr/locacl/bin/ down.

2) Build Postgres user

1 . su

2 . Enter the password

3 . admintool

2 28

4 . Increase user Postgres

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 16/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 29

5 . su postgres

6 . Password:Postgres

7 . Package Tools under .profile files are copied to /export/home/Postgres Xia

8 . mkdirdata

9 . Close the console

3) Installing Postgres:

1 . Gunzippostgresql8.1.0.tar.gz // generates PostgreSQL8.1.0.tar

2 . Tarxvfpostgresql8.1.0.tar // PostgreSQL8.1.0 Directory

3 . cdpostgresql8.1.0

4 . ./configurewhithoutreadline

5 . /usr/local/bin/make

6 . su

7 . Enter the password

8 . /usr/local/bin/makeinstall

9 . chownRhpostgres/usr/local/posql

10 . su postgres

11 . Password:Postgres

12 . initdb

13 . Exit the console

4) Modifying settings

1 . supostgres

2 . Password:Postgres

3 . cddata

4 . Ls found in pg_hba.conf, andEditPostgreSQL.conf the two files.

5 . Windows need to modify "Editpg_hba.conf" and "EditPostgreSQL.conf".

" Editpg_hba.conf " Modify the same windows "EditPostgreSQL.conf" to read as follows:

#Listen_addresses= ' localhost ' Change the Listen_addresses='*'

#port=5432 Change to port=5432

#client_min_messages=notice Change to client_min_messages=error

Note that they set ' # ' Be deleted

6 . Su // switch to superuser

7 . Password:1111 // superuser password

8 . Package Tools under S99pgStart copying files to /etc/RC2.d down.

Note: must be used root Permissions to perform the steps

5) Environment variable settings

1 . Su // switch to superuser

2 . Password:1111 // superuser password

3 . cd/etc

4 . VIprofile // Edit the profile file,VI using the cumbersome, we recommend using root login using dtpad

5 . Profile file to modify PATH variable // can refer to the sample

PATH=/usr/local/pgsql/bin:/usr/local/pgsql/lib:$PATH+ Legacy content

6 . Exit the console

6) Increase tablespace directory:

Assumes that the monitoring system installation directory is: \export\home\app\csc2100_home Steps are as follows:

1 . su postgres

2 . Password:Postgres

3 . cd\export\home\app\csc2100_home

4 . mkdirdbfile

5 . chmoda+wrdbfile

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 17/126
1/10/2017 <br>

6 . Exit the console

2.4MSSQL installed
MSSQL Installation is simple, according to the portion of the red line in the graphic example below ( following illustration for the
SQLServer7.0 installation interface,SQLServer2000 installation interface is slightly different ) Need to be aware of is that if
you install SQLServer2000, after the installation is complete is also necessary to install a SQLServer2000DriverforJDBC
patches, or monitoring program installation will have a problem . The patch installation CD setup\support\win Directory and named
Sql2000_JDBC_setup.exe. Can also be obtained from the Microsoft Web site to download SQLServer2000DriverforJDBC

( http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=86212d548488481db46baf29bb18e1e5&DisplayLang=en)

2 30 2 31

2 32 2 33

2 34 2 35

2 36 2 37

2 38 2 39

End of the installation.

There need to be modified C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc Under host File. At the end of the file add this machine's IP address
and hostname.

2 40

2 41

3Java installation
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 18/126
1/10/2017 <br>
3.1Unix System Java installation

java Installation should be in root User rights to complete.

Copies the needed files will be installed to unpack the machine and method oracle Installed copies. Java Setup program J2SDK
1_4_1_03SolarisSPARC.sh and J2SDK1_4_1_03Solarissparcv9.sh,J2SE_Solaris_8_Recommended.zip copied to the /usr Directory
for installation, note that before installing the Java installation files property can perform:chmod+xfilename.
#chmod+xj2sdk1_4_1_03solarissparc.sh
#chmod+xj2sdk1_4_1_03solarissparcv9.sh
#./j2sdk1_4_1_03solarissparc.sh
...
#./j2sdk1_4_1_03solarissparcv9.sh
...
#/usr/j2sdk1.4.1_03/bin/javajar/usr/j2sdk1.4.1_03/demo/jfc/SwingSet2/SwingSet2.jar // Set system properties, is very
important . The best first ls Take a look at j2sdk1.4.1_03 Whether a folder has been established, close the pop-up dialog box.
...
#unzipJ2SE_Solaris_8_recommended.zip// Extract the patch files

#cdJ2SE_Solaris_8_recommended
#./install_cluster// To install the patch, about half an hour, java Installed.
Note: the above Java1.4 for example the Java installation, the release package version shall prevail. Other Java version installed
may refer to the above method.

3.2Windows System Java installation

Current requirements java Version 1.5 Above.

Java Installation:

Obtained from the installation package java Setup.

Double-click java Installer to install it. Because the installation is relatively simple, follow the prompts all the way "Next" . This
is not illustrated. Needs to be configured according to the default configuration on the line.

3.3Java fonts added

The installation package CSC2100_HOME/data/fonts Copy the font file to under JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/fonts

Note: CSC2100_HOME JAVA_HOME Is the name of the environment variable, you need to replace with actual path to.

4CSC2000 V2 ( ) installation of monitoring system

4.1 Environment variable settings
For installation and operation monitoring system needs to set an environment variable CSC2100_HOME JAVA_HOME

4.1.1 UNIX operating system environment variable is set

The installation package profile (In the installation package, \data\unix Part two) copies the file to install the monitoring system under
the user's home directory (usually a /export/home/app ), And copy to .profile File. Modify the environment variables CSC2100_HOME and
JAVA_HOME values. Generally:

CSC2100_HOME=/export/home/app/csc2100_home

JAVA_HOME=/usr/jdk1.5.0_02

CSC2100_HOME The value is the path to the installation package later, JAVA_HOME Values for the java The installation path.

After installing the monitoring system, the implementation of MkS100TimeSet Programs, program timeset Start automatically after boot.
Restart the host check timeset procedures. Note that each host needs to start timeset.

4.1.2Windows operating systemenvironment variable is set

" My computer " click on " Properties " to " System Properties " screen, select " Advanced ", click " environment variables "
entered " Environment variables " settings interface

4 1 4 2

Click " System variables " in the " new " button to create a new system variable CSC2100_HOME. Settings are as follows:

4 3

Variable name:CSC2100_HOME

The value of the variable: monitoring system home directory.

The above steps to set the environment variable CSC2100_HOME, we also need to monitor and control system of two directory in the home

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 19/126
1/10/2017 <br>
directory Path in the path. Methods are as follows:

First select " System variables " in the Path variable, click the Edit

4 4

Path variable the value of the variable prepend "%CSC2100_HOME%\bin;%CSC2100_HOME%\lib;" , And then click OK.

4 5

At this point we have completed an environment variable CSC2100_HOME settings.

Next, add an environment variable JAVA_HOME Add step with environment variable CSC2100_HOMe the same, just need to create a new
environment variable JAVA_HOME, the value of the variable fill Java installation directory (such as C:\java1.5), and then in the Path
variable in the head add "%JAVA_HOME%\bin;"

Meanwhile, to make the program Timeset.exe post boot, copy the shortcut to the start menu In the startup directory.

Note: the above example mentioned in the specific values with your settings are not the same, please change more according to the
actual situation.

4.2Scada installation
Installation package is first solved. Suppose the solution to D:\csc2100_home.

Note: in the windows Operating system only a user administrator rights can usually have the ability to write to disk. Establishment
of database table space, open storage table space required disk permissions. Methods are as follows:
Note: in the windows Operating system only a user administrator rights can usually have the ability to write to disk. PGSQL database
to database table space establishment, open storage table space required disk permissions. See PGSQL database installation.
Open a DOS Window, type install , Or to %csc2100_home%\bin Double-click install.bat Enter the Setup Wizard interface.

4 6

4 7

4 8 4 9

At the second step of the installation wizard, click " Setting the system files ... " Button to set the config.sys File. Click " set
history file ... " Button to set the hisconfig.ini File. About config.sys file and hisconfig.ini file settings please refer to the table below:
config.sys Table 4 1

Item Value example Explanation

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 20/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Item Value example Explanation
DataSourceType PGSQL Database types /ORACLE/MSSQL/PGSQL

DataSourceName myData The primary database service name

BackSourceName myData Standby database service name, be consistent with the primary database service name
DBHostName Scada1 Primary database server machine name, Oracle Useless

BackDBHostName Scada2 Prepare the database server machine name, Oracle Useless

MainPort 5432 Primary database port ORACLE=1521 , MSSQL=1433 , PGSQL=5432

BackPort 5432 Database port ORACLE=1521 , MSSQL=1433 , PGSQL=5432

ScadaNet1 230.8.10.8
ScadaNetMask1 255.255.255.0

ScadaNet2 230.8.10.8
ScadaNetMask2 255.255.255.0
MainServerID Scada1 Primary server machine name ( hostname )

MainServerIP1 192.168.1.100 Master server IP Address 1

MainServerIP2 192.168.2.100 Master server IP Address 2

MainServerNodeType 0x15FFFFFF

BackServerID Scada2 The server machine name ( hostname )

BackServerIP1 192.168.1.200 Preparing servers IP Address 1

BackServerIP2 192.168.2.200 Preparing servers IP Address 2

BackServerNodeType 0x15FFFFFF
LocalNodeID Scada1 This machine machine name ( hostname )

LocalNodeIP1 192.168.1.100 This machine IP Address 1

LocalNodeIP2 192.168.2.100 This machine IP Address 2

LocalNodeType 0x15FFFFFF
DevTimeOut 35
DeadZome 5
DevTimeOut2 35

ZHUZHANADDER 1
SQLDBName myData Database name, be consistent with the primary database service name, Oracle Useless

SQLUser scada1
SQLPassword scada1
HisSQLDBName myData Database name, be consistent with the primary database service name, Oracle Useless

HisSQLUser scada1

HisSQLPassword scada1
ModalSQLDBName myData Database name, be consistent with the primary database service name, Oracle Useless

ModalSQLUser scada1
ModalSQLPassword scada1
GraphSQLDBName myData Database name, be consistent with the primary database service name, Oracle Useless

GraphSQLUser scada1
GraphSQLPassword scada1
AppTabSQLDBName myData Database name, be consistent with the primary database service name, Oracle Useless

AppTabSQLUser scada1
AppTabSQLPassword scada1

Gray line does not appear in the Setup.

Note: does not give a comment in connection with this Addendum shall prevail. Unless the notice has a new set of project research
and Development Center.

hisconfig.ini Table 4 2

Item Value example Explanation

Primary database type 1

Database types Value

No 1
MSSQLServer 0
Oracle 1

Sybase 2
DB2 3
InforMix 4
PostgreSQL 5
MySQL 6

MSAccess 7


The primary database IP1 192.168.1.100 config.sys In the file MainServerIP1

The primary database IP2 192.168.2.100 config.sys In the file MainServerIP2

Database user name history config.sys In the file HisSQLUser

Master database password history config.sys In the file HisSQLPassword

Primary database port 5432 config.sys In the file MainPort

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 21/126
1/10/2017 <br>
The primary database service name myData config.sys In the file DataSourceName , And the consistent

Database types 1 With the primary server

Standby databases IP1 192.168.1.200 config.sys In the file BackServerIP1

Standby databases IP2 192.168.2.200 config.sys In the file BackServerIP2

Database user name history config.sys In the file HisSQLUser

Database password history config.sys In the file HisSQLPassword

Database port 5432 config.sys In the file BackPort

Standby database service name myData config.sys In the file BackSourceName , And the consistent

Remote measurement of store hours 1 1 On behalf of store hours, and daily telemetry statistics according to the hours value
statistics
Remote sensing survey cycle 30 Unit: seconds
Electric cycles 60 Unit: seconds
PDR Frames before the accident 20 Unit: frame, that is, section number

PDR Prior period 5 Unit: seconds

PDR Number of frames after the 120 Unit: frame, that is, section number
accident
PDR Cycle after the accident 5 Unit: seconds

4 10

Click " Setting template ... "And set the default system configuration. Usually when we install a new station there are many, such as
alarms, color, setting permissions is similar to past, you have modified the settings into a file (via the command export), the placement
of these files path specified here, the installer will write these default settings in the database. If not specified, Setup will import
%CSC2100_HOME%\data\defaultset file under.

4 11

In the fourth step of the installation set up the installation type of the host. Installation types there are three types: primary
servers, backup servers, and others.
Primary server: native as a monitoring and control system of the main data server. This machine you need to install the
appropriate database.
Standby: standby data server of this machine as a monitoring system. This machine you need to install the appropriate database.
Other: will this machine as a monitor system operations and engineering station and so on. This machine does not need to install
the appropriate database.

4 12

The last Setup will list all of the installation settings, if there are deficiencies, can be reset to return to the previous
interface. If all is ready, click Install button to install monitoring systems.

Note: before installing, you must ensure that the data service in the started state, during installation do not open data service
connection, so that the Setup program failed to connect.

4.3Scada related accessories set

4.3.1 Reader settings
If increased reader, you need to make the following settings. Otherwise, this section can be skipped.

4.3.1.1 Windows settings under

The installation package csc2100_home/data/win/ The following files: javax.comm.properties Copy to java The installation directory of jre/lib
Directory (normally C:\ProgramFiles\Java\jdk1.5.0_05\jre\lib , Suppose JAVA_HOME=C:\ProgramFiles\Java\jdk1.5.0_05 );

4.3.1.2 Unix Setup under

The installation package csc2100_home/data/unix/ The following files: javax.comm.properties Copy to java The installation directory of lib
Directory (normally /usr/jdk1.5.0_05/lib );

The installation package csc2100_home/data/unix/ The following files: libSolarisSerialParallel.so Copy to CSC2100 The installation directory of
lib Directory (normally /export/home/app/csc2100_home/lib )

4.3.2 Software encryption locks installation

CSC2000(V2) Normal operation of the monitoring system of external keys, will only run in demo form.

CSC2000(V2) Monitoring system uses the interfaces of the cryptographic lock is the parallel port mode, monitor on while the system
is running in the parallel ports for the computer, when driver right after installation, the monitoring system will operate correctly,
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 22/126
1/10/2017 <br>
is running in the parallel ports for the computer, when driver right after installation, the monitoring system will operate correctly,
otherwise it will run in demo version, 5 Will automatically exit after hours.

4.3.2.1 Windows installed under

Please do not insert the keys when you install

Run the Setup program:csc2100_home\data\win\ keys-drive \SSD541132bit.exe

After plug in encryption locks, run the test program SPTestApp: initialize successful, query succeeded says the installation was
successful

4.3.2.2 UNIX installation under

Copy csc2100_home\data\unix\ keys-drive \SUD.zip to UNIX computers

On Unix computers, do UnzipSUD.zip, and extract the driver package.
bash2.03$su
Password:1111( password)
Enter the SUD/rbdr/install Directory
Lsl/dev/ecpp0, the output information is shown in the following example, specific information varies according to the model.
lrwxrwxrwx1rootroot543 Month 20 12:55/dev/ecpp0> ../devices/pci@8,700000/ebus@5/parallel@1,300278:ecpp0,

Copy parallel After the bold, as the next setup parameter.

#./postinstall@1,300278:ecpp0
detectparallelportonslot:0x1offset:0x300278
Driver(rbdr)isalreadyinstalled.
If as mentioned above, is installed correctly.
After installation, installed in the parallel keys, run SPTestApp , Verify that the encryption locks installed successfully. The
entire installation process shown in the following figure.

4 13

4.4 Installed supplementary explanation

4.4.1 Setting up the printer

4.4.1.1 Real-time alarm print

Real-time alarm using dot matrix printer to print, you should connect the laser printer on the host for alarm printing. Real-time
alarm print recommend using Epson LQ1600K printer.
A. The printer is connected to a monitoring host and port;
B. Perform TestPrint print test program, verifying that your printer is functioning properly.
C. After you start the monitor, a native in the node management print service enabled. Save and then restart the machine
monitoring systems. View PrintApp is started.
D. Setting alarm alarm set alarm set the printing options you want to print. In local settings , select print alarm inputs .
E. Trigger the alarm, check printing is normal.

4.4.1.2 Graphic print

Windows Under the platform, and print settings for graphics and reports, mainly printer driver installation, without elaborating.
Note that does not work and alarm on a single host. On the Solaris platform, graphic prints currently only supports HP LaserJetHP5100
printer. Solaris we use is cups Print Driver Pack. SunBlade2500, andUltra45 Sparc machine use issued a CD support/sparc/print_Sparc.zip Drive. Sun
w1100zand theUltra20 x86 models use issued a disc of support/x86_print_x86.zip.
1. Parallel port settings
Due to differences in hardware platforms, Blade2500, andBlade2000 and other old Sun Sparc architecture models and device URL for
parallel:/dev/ecpp0 and Ultra45, the 06 year Sun New Sun Sparc architecture on the models without parallel. Need to use the USB transfer
mode for the parallel port, HP5100 printer extension cable connected to the USB port. View the /dev/USB Directory increased the printer
device name, such as printer0. The device URL for . USB:/dev/USB/printer0
2. the cups to frequently used commands require root user:
/Etc/init.d/cups restart// restart the cups service, after execution of this command, you need to restart the desk, do not need to
restart the computer or process management program localm.
Lpadmin-x HP5100// remove named HP5100 printer
Lpadmin-d HP5100// HP5100 printer to be the default printer for the system

Lp-omedia=A3./XXXX.XXX;// print system commands, meaning for A3 paper to print the current path of XXXX.XXX file under the
system print command, print is garbled characters, can be ignored.
Lpadmin-p laserjet-E-v URL -m LaserJet.PPD// Add the name was changed to XXXX laser printer, connected to host devices See also
URL and set the.
3. Installation steps to Ultra 45 installed, for example, driver files to print_Sparc.zip.
1) Driver packages in the app Next unlock.
unzipprint_Sparc.zip
cdprint_Sparc/cups//,x86 Under print_x86/cups

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 23/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Installation instructions may also refer to the directory ofreadme.txt
su// root Login
1111// Password

./cups.install// Installing printer drivers

2) Open a browser // start will report errors without reason.
In the browser, enter http://localhost:631 See if you find a Web page
3) Root permissions to execute the following command
lpadminplaserjetEvusb:/dev/usb/ printer0 mlaserjet.ppd

// laserjet Print name can be customized.

For example: lpadminpHP5100Evusb:/dev/usb/ printer0 mlaserjet.ppd

//Add name HP5100 Printer, connected to host devices /dev/usb/printer0 Use driver files for LaserJet.PPD.
4) Root permissions, execute the following command to set the system default printer
lpadmindlaserjet// laserjet Laser printer to be the default printer for the system

For example: lpadmindHP5100// HP5100 Setting your printer as the default printer

Note: the above command functions only when connected to the printer is running on the computer, other computers using a
network printing need to perform 1 2 Two step.
Modify client configuration file /etc/cups/client.confto specify the print server.
/Etc/cups/cupsd.conf, simply install directory in the modal Directory cupsd.conf cover
/Etc/cups Directory.
/Etc/cups/client.conf, only in accordance with the installation directory in client.conf instance file, specifying
Host name of the print server. Note must be the /etc/hosts file is the host name of the print server is set correctly.
You modify the configuration file, you need to restart the cups service
5) Shared printers to other host computer because this version of cups default configuration does not open up network printing
function, you need to modify the local configuration files on the machine to install a printer /etc/cups/cupsd.conf, making it an
open external network print services.
CP modal/cupsd.conf/etc/cups// Replace with template configuration files
/Etc/init.d/cups restart// cups Services
For other monitoring hosts, root User modify /Etc/cups/client.conf, increase row, specify the host name of the shared printer, and
then restart the cups Services. The following figure:

4 14

4.4.1.3 Network print server setup ( network servers HPJETDIRECT500X)

Network print server makes printers do not rely on your computer from a network print server directly connected to the printer, and
computer network access to print to a network print server.
A. Hold down on the network server, test button, after a few seconds the network server IP addresses can initialize IP address of
192.0.0.192
B. Network servers connected to the printer, press test button to print a test page, which describes the Web server IP address
C. A computer with Windows operating system of the computer through the HUB and connected to the network server, set up a computer
network server on the same network segment, running its Web server to install software, prompted its IP address changes to the
monitoring host network IP, such as 192.168.10.199
D. Root permissions to execute the following command
lpadminplaserjetEvlpd://192.168.10.199mlaserjet.ppd
// laserjet The printer name can be customized.
//192.168.10.199 : Network servers IP Address

4.4.1.4 Common printing problems

1 . Install a printer on the host site can realize printing function, while in other monitor but not on the host network printing
function, this is often due to a network configuration file /etc/hosts on the hosts in the configuration information of the reason

Check file /etc/hosts

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 24/126
1/10/2017 <br>
#
#Internethosttable
#
127.0.0.1localhost
192.168.10.10scada1_1scada1
192.168.20.10scada1_2scada1
192.168.10.20scada2_1scada2

hosts Station monitor host information best be configured completely, some hosts configure several hosts. For all configuration file
using VI to check the last line of the configuration file is complete, if the last line is not a complete monitoring system will affect
the normal use.
2 . Due to the actual location of the printer changes, you need to change its method of the connecting host

In General, the first delete printer installed on the host, then add printers on the host of the printer you need to install it. But
some will be unable to delete printer exception occurs. Delete printer command is executed, the console passwordforrootonSCADA? And
password you entered is invalid. This method is as follows
1) Enter the corresponding cups installation directory, type Su command to switch to the root user
2) ./Cups.Remove, uninstall cups.
3) Root permissions to the entire delete /etc/cups folder, check the/var Directory,
4) Follow the above steps to reinstall printer installed printers
3 . Unable to print
For many reasons, we follow the principle of from the outside in by checking the printer, cable, operating systems, cups The order. If
the printer and connection lines correctly, and in the console, type LP test document prints correctly, you can restart the Desk solution.
Or you can restart the cups service, if necessary, reinstall the printer, reinstall the printer driver solution.

Attention cups Fills up the buffer when the exception, if you use dfk Command find " / " No free space partition, you can delete
/var/spool/cups/ Directory, then watch the phenomenon, according to the above-mentioned steps to resolve.

4.4.2 Dual-display setup

Configuration method /Usr/dt/config/Xservers

1. :0Locallocal_uid@consoleroot/usr/openwin/bin/Xsun:0nobanner shield;
2. #:0Locallocal_uid@consoleroot/usr/openwin/bin/Xdev/dev/ffb0dev/dev/ffb1 line # removed;
3. dual-screen display you need to change $CSC2100_HOME/project/MMI/MmiDeskTop.ini to the following form
//////////////MmiDeskTop.ini////////////////////
#MmiDesktopPropertiesListinMmiDesktop.ini
#TueJan2813:13:11CST2003
ImageModeOfScreen1=3
ImageNameOfScreen1=/export/home/app/\u53D8\u7535\u81EA\u52A8\u5316.prj/\u7CFB\u7EDF\u8D44\u6E90/\u56FE\u8C61/b29.jpg
BackColorOfScreen1=16750951
#MmiDesktopPropertiesListinMmiDesktop.ini
#TueJan2813:13:11CST2003
ImageModeOfScreen0=3
ImageNameOfScreen0=/export/home/app/\u53D8\u7535\u81EA\u52A8\u5316.prj/\u7CFB\u7EDF\u8D44\u6E90/\u56FE\u8C61/b29.jpg
BackColorOfScreen0=16750951
4. then reboot to reboot the machine.

4.4.3 Into the opened module installation

Currently in use into the open module has two ADAN4050( into 7 Road, opened 8 road ) and ADAN4060(Into 4 Road, opened 4 road ).
Because 4050 module out of the junction capacity, electric flute Bell out must now use 4060 module.

Module factory has a default address used when using manufacturer's software to set its address, address required continuous
setting and should not repeat, recommended starting from 3 begins between 485 network connected in parallel, and then through
the 485/232 Converter associated with the serial port of the server.

Module stand-by using two sets of configured exactly the same module, terminal access to the primary and backup servers;
between the two groups should be fully independent.
In the dinout.sys file in the configuration module number, the starting address, module number.

Real-time database of configuration tools into the open terminal handles correspondence table definition, and then boot into
the open process, if the process is not running, check if the module is faulty, configuration files, into the open terminals
whether the table has errors.
Note:
Into the open Terminal table editing in real-time database configuration tool is to define the module away from Adam into
and out of the relationship with the imaginary point. This table is not defined or defined errors into the open process will not run
properly.

4.5 Monitoring and control system of start and stop

Monitoring and control system UNIX Windows Start varies, as follows

Unix

When you start the host, wait about 1 Minutes of time, commercial database is started in the background after the new console. Run
the command:

localm , Start monitoring daemon services, CA 1 Minutes later,

desk , Start the interface program.

After the primary server is started, then start other hosts. In a host must not start not start completed another host.

scadaexit , Background service exit monitoring system, monitoring system completely exit.

Windows

When you start the host, wait about 1 Minutes of time, commercial database is started in the background after the new console. Run
the command:

startjk Start monitoring service Daemon And monitoring daemon services started correctly, Daemon Automatically monitor interface
procedures. In the case of interface programs to start, unable to exit the Daemon monitoring program, you must first exit the monitor
interface program.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 25/126
1/10/2017 <br>

windows Xia, can also be started via the console localm desk , Can also be used scadaexit Close monitoring services. Considerations for
UNIX. Note that running localm zhiqian, first on the same command line window run setclasspath commands to set environment variables.

5 Monitoring and control system upgrades

With the increase and improvement of monitoring system, monitoring system development will inevitably face upgrade problems. For
upgrade in two main types: structural change and the database table structure does not change the database table. As to whether the
database table structure changes, see that comes with the new version of the change notice or follow the upgrade steps in the design
notes to upgrade.
Will be introduced for both below.

5.1 Database table structure changed in case of upgrade

Because the database structure and the structure of the table has changed (mostly adding table column), the need to build new
databases from the new table structure. This upgrade requires a new installation in the context of monitoring and control system (no
need to install new database). Original data needs to be backed up before installing. The steps are as follows:
1.the business back up to a file, check the exported report file data does not meet in the middle. If so, you must first check the
reason; if not, proceed to the next step.
2. the original csc2100_home list of the entire backup. Assuming the backup to csc2100_home_bak(not renamed)

3. determine the previous step correctly, the original csc2100_home directory except for DBFile Directory and project Directory for all
directory and file deletion.
4.the new distribution in csc2100_home under the directory and file (excluding the DBFile Directory and project Directory), and copy to
the original Csc2100_home Directory.
5.the 2 -step backup directory csc2100_home_bak\config Directory of config.sys and Hisconfig.ini copied to the csc2100_home\config Directory
(overwrite the existing file).
6.the new distribution csc2100_home\project\ system configuration directory of all files copied to the csc2100_home\project\ system
configuration directory (overwrite the existing file).
7. Open a console ( Dos window), run the install program, installing monitoring systems. Installation hints appear in the database has
been established and the user already exists error message, ignore and continue with the installation.
8. after a successful installation, 1 step files backed up using INOUT command to import to the business library.

9. new start the monitoring system. The upgrade is complete.

Note: the originalcsc2100_homeDirectory from beginning to end, do not delete, move, rename, and so on.
5.2 Database table structure does not change the case of upgrade
Because the table structure does not change, no need to reinstall, upgrade steps are as follows:
1. the original csc2100_home list of the entire backup (not renamed).

2. determine the previous step correctly, original csc2100_home Directory of the binand thelib, andjavalib Directory deleted.

3. new distribution package in csc2100_home under the bin, andlib, andjavalib Directory replication to the original Csc2100_home
Directory.
4.the new distribution csc2100_home\project\ system configuration directory of all files copied to the csc2100_home\project\ system
configuration directory (overwrite the existing file).

5. for Unix systems, you will need to install packages in the profile(package is installed in the \data\unix below) copies the file to
install the monitoring system under the user's home directory (usually a /export/home/app ), And copy to .profile File (preferably well
before the cover original .profile File). Modify the environment variables CSC2100_HOME and JAVA_HOME values. Generally:

CSC2100_HOME=/export/home/app/csc2100_home

JAVA_HOME=/usr/jdk1.5.0_02

CSC2100_HOME The value is the path to the installation package later, JAVA_HOME Values for the java The installation path.

6. new start the monitoring system. The upgrade is complete.

Note: the originalcsc2100_homeDirectory from beginning to end, do not delete, move, rename, and so on.
5.3 The expansion in real time
Open on the primary server node $CSC2100_HOME/config/data_test.def File, in accordance with the changes in the box in the following
figure needs to modify the maximum capacity value of the appropriate data type, then save.

5 1

After making sure that no problem, synchronize to other nodes data_test.def File.

Then, in the database, modify the TABTABBLEINFO In the field value, consistent with the configuration file.
Oracle For example, in the Oracle Next, run the oemappdbastudio Command, landed the master server Oracle Database, expand Schema Table
SCADA1 TABTABLEINFO, Right-click, pop-up floating menu, select TableDataEditor ...
The graph below.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 26/126
1/10/2017 <br>

5 2

Eject the data Explorer window shown in the following figure. Modifying records in the box values, consistent with the configuration
file. Then click the Apply button.

5 3

Close all host monitoring application, or the primary server from the network. Running on the primary server localm, select initialize
realtime library. To start normally, and about 1 minute later, run the Desk procedures, real-time library configuration tool, see the
display is normal. Add real points, bringing the number of its more than capacity without having to expand, checks whether the added
normal amount four remote observation system refresh is right or not. Add real experimental data, be careful not to save the business.
After the above checks, real-time expansion of success. Restart the primary server localm, select initialize realtime library. Host is
functioning correctly, start the additional node monitoring applications.
Have been put into operation, in order to avoid upgrade affect the substation monitoring, you can run the primary server from the
network, field staff and other nodes of the server accessible. Master servers after the upgrade is complete, close the other host
monitoring system, network access the primary server, and then restart the other host applications.

The third chapter System configuration

Directory

1LOCAL SETTINGS
2SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.1GRAPHICS PROPERTIES

2.2REMOTE CONTROL SETTINGS

2.3TONE EDITING

2.4START AUTOMATICALLY

2.5SUBSTATION SETS

3NODE MANAGEMENT
3.1NODE MANAGEMENT

3.2APPLICATION SETTINGS FOR A NODE

4USER MANAGEMENT
4.1USER MANAGEMENT

4.2SET USER GROUP PERMISSIONS

5HISTORY CONFIGURATION

1 Local settings
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 27/126
1/10/2017 <br>
As shown in the following figure, through the start menu go to local settings.

1 1

Local settings interface as shown below. The local setting is used to start / stop system functions and used for electric flute,
electric Bell test. Figure, you can start / stop features include electric flute Bell, alarm print, alarm VQC inputs. In front of the
function call "", determined to enable the function, otherwise remove "" means to stop the function.

1 2

Need to be aware of is that four local settings configuration and node management node in the application settings into the open,
print, sound alarm, VQC Services / disabled status has a direct relationship. Only when these services are working in node management
case, select corresponding functions in the local settings to take effect. If the node management services is prohibited in the State,
even in here tick the corresponding input. Unable to receive service.
Whether through into the open module driver play files or through the speakers, bells and loud whistle you have to ensure that the
electric flute Bell input function is selected.
If you need to play audio files, you will need to ensure that your system has a voice alert services on the host ( See also 3.2
points successively application settings ) has been launched. While the voice alarm input functions are selected.

2 System settings
System settings include the graphic properties, remote control settings, tags Editor, starts automatically and the property setting.
As shown in the following figure. Click application modules > system settings, access to the system settings screen.

2 1

2.1 Graphics properties

Open the graphics properties page of the system setup interface box, as shown in the following figure. This interface is used to set
in a graphical topologic coloring and color when color. Coloring is intended to facilitate direct through a graphical color
discrimination-related parameters, such as voltage, the circuit is live.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 28/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 2

To change the color settings of an item, click the appropriate color button pop-up palette, select the desired color can be
determined.

2.2 Remote control settings

Open the remote control settings page setup interface box, as shown in the following figure. Can set all through the interface and
remote control-related operations.

2 3

2.2.1 Different operators and guardianship

Select this item to indicate operator and supervision to complete remote control permissions validation operations on different
machines. If nothing is selected, then the operator and monitoring need to be completed in sequence on a single machine remote control
permissions validation.

2.2.2 Five inputs of total station

If you select all five inputs, remote control switch, switch device five defence services prompted.

2.2.3 Blocking input

Blocking input is in the remote-control locking hard into judgment. If you select lock input, when into the ban when the remote
control, and unconditional prohibition of remote control of the system. If you do not select lock input, when into the ban when the
remote control, the system will automatically notify the operator " current remote control locking, do you want to remote control? " Of
course, to achieve these functions, requirements must have remote points correspond to open into one by one. Names of these remote
points is required. That can only be " total lock " or node name ( node node ID)+" lock ". Computer node names are case sensitive.

2.2.4 Against the main interface remote control

If selected, the established image in a graphics editing type wiring diagram graphics ( Rather than merely refer to the establishment
of the main interface .graph) Prohibited by the remote control.

2.2.5 Password valid

Operator and custody once in the remote control password expiration permissions validation in the term do not have to repeat the
input.

2.2.6 Remote authentication settings

Need for remote control operation of equipment, such as circuit breakers, switch, pressure plate and tap up, tap, tap Stop down and
universal remote control, you can verify the number, need to manipulate people verify, needs a guardian, validation and remote control
select the authentication setting as needed. Number validation library configuration in real time in the remote control properties box,
set the two-number validation. When you do not need to perform remote operation remote control select the authentication that is, remote
control the remote control select button page are dimmed, and remote control select automatically, without manual operation remote
control select back, remote execute button to brighten, operational, or timed out. If you need to remote control select the
authentication, the remote control select button on the remote control page for operational, do people click on the remote control to
select buttons, remote control option.

2.3 Tone editing

Open a listing edit page setup interface box, as shown in the following figure.

2 4

In order to meet the different needs of users around the, open tone of the power system. Can be defined by users, each card provides
two settings " screen message " and " ban remote control ".
In addition to the need to define a brand name, you also need to define the entity. Click on the " Select ", you can select the
appropriate listing Mark entities. (Symbol-editing). Running under listing, the tone mark appears the content in the entity. The size of
the card or by editing the components to adjust the default size in the graphics.
" Screen message " is for the interval. When hung in a device select this setting, the device of the interval in which messaging
system will not be processed. Is primarily used in the commissioning phase in order to avoid interval send lots of alarm system work
properly. " Ban remote control " is directed to a device. When hung in a device select this setting, here mainly refers to the switch,
the switch of the device, then the system against remote control of the device.

2.4 Start automatically

Open the Setup interface automatically start page box, as shown in the following figure.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 29/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 5

Autostart refers to user after login is complete, applications can automatically start " Alarm window " is the default.

" Quick start " is based on you need to define a set of common application shortcut set, by launching the " Quick-start " interface
can be convenient when you need to open applications.
Start automatically configure the local host, so automatic startup configuration can be different for each primary station.
Common practice is to monitor running Windows is configured to start automatically, so users automatically after you log into the
graphical interface.

2.5 Substation sets

Box substation open system settings interface settings page, as shown in the following figure.

2 6

2.5.1 The safe operation of the number of days

Here is seen in the information bar at the top left of the screen running days information security, if the system is safe and this
value is incremented by the day of the accident, modifications to initialize the value of the until after the accident began after a
recount.
Changes can be reflected immediately. Need to be aware of is that modifications to the current host, can reflect changes immediately
after running days, but other hosts to reflect the modified safe operation the next day to the days. To think that other hosts can also
reflect at once, as long as the user's desktop on restart the host.

2.5.2 Bell pipe speakers

Not through into the open when the accident alarm card-driven bells, electric flute, but local audio files. If it's used in node
management to process configuration in the application settings when opened into the process can be disabled.

2.5.3 Reader input

User authentication is implemented by credit card required on this feature;

2.5.4 Fingerprint reader input

User authentication by fingerprint recognition don't require this feature;

2.5.5 Five anti-integration into

If you select is used to enable the built-in five-prevention function. If it is not selected, it indicates that foreign
manufacturers to five systems. Specific content can be found on the five anti-integration-related engineering and maintenance manuals
and instructions section. Integrated five-prevention function inputs, also require the system to set the remote control settings page "
total commitment to station five " function input ( Chapter 2.2 ), so that when the remote control will conduct five logical rules.

3 Node management

Click the application module > System Management > Node management, will start the node management. Node management is to manage all
hosts on the same network. And the back of the same user management and process management, it also entered must be a super user to
manage.
As shown in the following figure, node management there are two pages: node management, and application settings for a node.

3 1

3.1 Node management

Node management page displays network nodes, increase network nodes, delete nodes, showing node State and saved to a database
function. Display network node displays node names, node ID, and two of the node's IP address and other information; if you add a new
computer to the network, can increase the network nodes, and then saved to the database; edit node is required ; Displays the network
status is mainly shown in the network the computer's network connection is normal.
Record here is usually added automatically after installation. If there is a particular need to modify content, need to pay
attention: node ID to add or modify the name of the computer ( requires a case-sensitive, you can use DOS command hostname access ).

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 30/126
1/10/2017 <br>
attention: node ID to add or modify the name of the computer ( requires a case-sensitive, you can use DOS command hostname access ).
Description of the node name of the machine, and node ID the same.

3.2 Application settings for a node

Application settings page of the node as shown in the following figure, divided into the machine property settings and application
settings on this computer.

3 2

3.2.1 Property settings on this computer

Set the is operator, and operator station, definition see diagram explanation. Only sets the operator and the operator station nodes
can be remote control. Operators and the main operator in the operator is the difference when the system exceeds the number of node 3 ,
when remote control monitoring staff and require the operator to work different when asked in one of the operator station to do remote
control, monitoring in the primary operator station monitoring.

3.2.2 Application settings on this computer

Display the configuration of the service, service status is set to disabled, or alternate, related definition see diagram
explanation. Is in need of attention: in most cases, system requirements only in a host of related services are working, in another host
in standby mode. System on one node in the topology, the topology of the node properties can only be configured on a single host. Setup
needs to restart your system after setting to take effect.
Five services: enabling integrated five-prevention services in native or foreign manufacturers to five interfaces. Five anti-
integration services configuration file for config\wfserver.ini. Foreign manufacturers to five interface configuration file for
config\wfserver.sys, one of five described application interface;
VQC: enable native VQC process;
Into the open: If the machine is configured into the out card, you need to enable that process; and the process associated with a
configuration file config\dinout.sys After you have configured the service configuration on the file is required and needs to be
configured when I refer to the comments in the file description and examples appropriate modification to the file; speakers drive Bell
electric flute, play bells, electric flute voice file number configured in this file;
Record communication: the machine starts recording communications process. Protection for working with the Quartet company processes
the recorded messages;
Topology services: process for handling network topologic coloring.
IEC61850: If the system put the 61850 -related equipment, you need to enable that process;
Remote interface: Yes Csc2100 systems and telecontrol interface service process, and the process has a configuration file config\
trans300e.sys After you have configured the service configuration on the file is required and needs to be configured when I refer to
the comments in the file description and examples appropriate modification to the file;
Release: Yes Csc2100 System public service process, when you need to transfer information to other third parties when, starting the
process, has a configuration file associated with the process config\cscentry.sys. If necessary according to the example file notes
accordingly modified;
Printed: This machine has configured the printer needs to be enabled for this process;

Sound alarm: the need to play voice files need to be enabled in the process.
Formula: formula is enabled by service master formula is logical analytical work;

4 User management
Click the application module -> management system -> user management, user management will start as shown in the following figure.
User management is used to manage users and set UNIX systems user group permission, permission in four grades, namely the super users,
maintainers, operators and browsers. It should be noted that must be entered as a super user, the user can make the following
administrative actions, such as adding, deleting users, or modify the permissions of an existing user.

4 1

As shown in the figure, user management has two tabs: user management and user group permission sets.

4.1 User management

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 31/126
1/10/2017 <br>

Pictured, left for the user menu, including add users, remove users, edit user and saved to the database of the four function
buttons; the right information for all users.
1) Users: click Add user, display the following figure

4 2

Enter a new user name in the user name, user password, enter the password, and select the permissions, and then click OK and,
finally, you need to click " Save data " Save results to the database, it displays as shown below.

4 3

2) delete user

4 4

Click the delete user, appear as shown in the figure on the interface, from the drop-down list box, select the user you want to
delete, and then click Delete. Finally click " Save data " Save results to the database.

3) Edit: first select a user, click on the Edit button, you can modify the user name, user rights and passwords, and then click OK to
finish. Finally click " Save data " Save results to the database.

4.2 Set user group permissions

4 5
User group permission sets left for the four groups, the right half of the permissions set for each user group, as shown in the
figure.
First of all, click on the user group you want to set, and then set right on the. Among the options on the right, italic, blue "
library configuration tool in real time ", and" monitor running Windows ", and" library to browse in real time " option there. Click to
select this option, all subkeys under the option permissions are assigned user. If an individual subkey permissions only to the user,
use the right mouse button to click the option setting permissions menu appears, as shown in the following figure.

4 6

Clicking this menu appears as shown in the figure below sets the permissions box, select the user groups to operate, can be
determined.

4 7

5 History configuration
History configuration involves two files: config/config.sys config/hisconfig.ini Configuration file uses a simple configuration file format,
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 32/126
1/10/2017 <br>
History configuration involves two files: config/config.sys config/hisconfig.ini Configuration file uses a simple configuration file format,
that is, Property=value Format. These two files,config.sys for reading the master node information is required double history. Hisconfig.ini is
used to configure the database type, host, database user, password, port, and other information. This section see chapter installation
related content.

The fourth chapterGraphics editing

Directory

1PROFILE
1.1OVERVIEW

1.2WORK ENVIRONMENT

2TOOLBAR ACTIONS
2.1FILE AND PRINT TOOLS

2.2ENTITY TOOL

2.3ACTIONS TOOLBAR

2.4THE PROPERTY INSPECTOR

2.5SHOW TOOL BAR

3PROPERTY SETTING
3.1TEXT PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.2BITMAP PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.3PROTECTION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.4NINE-ZONE DIAGRAM PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.5THE BUTTON PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.6BAR CHART, PIE CHART PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.7DYNAMIC TAG ATTRIBUTES DIALOG BOX

3.8DEVICE PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

3.9ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES BULK CHANGES

3.10ENTITIES PROPERTY STORAGE

4GRAPHIC PRODUCTION
4.1ENTITY MAKING

4.2DYNAMIC TAG BATCH PRODUCTION

4.3CONNECTION

4.4INTERVAL MATCHING

4.5FILE SYNCHRONIZATION

4.6GALLERY OF IMPORT, EXPORT,

4.7ANCHOR POINT USES

5SYMBOL-EDITING
6EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
7FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 33/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 Profile
1.1 Overview
Graphic editor responsible for main wiring diagram, each interval map production. Making good the graphics are open for browsing can
be run in real time.
In the graphics editor, primitives are the most basic elements. There are two main types: the basic entity, dynamic entity. Basic
entity does not need to be configured measurement points, does not change at run time. Like text, lines, and so on. Dynamic entity that
is required to configure a variety of information, shape can be changed dynamically at run time, or you can provide a variety of
actions, such as telemetry and remote data display, remote control using dynamic entities. Currently offers two types of dynamic
entities: the primitive equipment and markings, equipment is mainly used for fabrication of equipment such as switches, switch, its
shape can be customized, and mark the shape change is fixed, such as bar charts, pie charts, nine districts, dynamic markings, etc.
Equipment entities in symbol-editing, the editing is complete. In a main electrical wiring diagram, such as switches, switch the
electrical components should be edited in symbol-editing, graphics editing equipment entities can use when editing. If you want to
change the shape of an electrical component, simply modify the appropriate symbol in the symbol-editing or specify a different component
shapes, main wiring diagram in the equipment entity will change.
Gallery integration implemented in a graphics editor, screen painting equipment entity, also would be added in real-time with
entities of the same type of equipment. Instead remove one entity, will also remove a device in real time. Therefore, when on the screen
device entities added, deleted, or when a property changes, in addition to save graphics should also be real-time data backup library.
Graphic editor graphics at the same time, also established the graphics connection will eventually establish a connection device,
namely topological connections, in order to achieve dynamic coloring of the graph, and for the system's advanced applications such as
VQC , Five, etc. A graphics editor with automatic disconnection, merge, cable features such as follows to ensure correct graphical
connection.
Graphics must be defined property, including type, size, substation. Size is measured in pixels, corresponding to the monitor
resolution. Therefore, in making graphics needs a unified computer resolution, to ensure that graphics are displayed on each computer is
the same, it is recommended that the size of a graph is the size of the current screen, no scroll bars appear.

1.2 Work environment

Click on the start - > Application module - > Graphics system - > Graphics editing, running graphic editing. Interface as shown in the
following figure:

1 1

Article title:At the top of the window, display graphics editing names and name of the image you are currently editing, most
appear to the right of the minimize button, the maximize button, the close button.

Article tools:In the window above and below, respectively. Above from left to right are File, print, toolbar, tools, display
toolbar. Below from left to right are the basic tools of the entities, and primitive tags toolbar, properties toolbar.

Thumbnail:In the upper-left corner of the window shows thumbnails of the current screen. When the graphic is large, you can use it
to quickly locate.

Equipment entities: In the lower left area of the window, organized by different device type equipment that has been made. This
entity should also be classified as a special device toolbar.

Drawing area:Most of the region is the main work area of paint in the middle of the window.
Storage pathGraphic store path is$ (CSC2100_HOME)/project/ graphics resources
$ (CSC2100_HOME) is the installation path of the system. Edited the graphic needs to be synchronized at one
computer to another computer. Entity store path is $ (CSC2100_HOME)/project/ primitives library resources. Entities also
need to be synchronized.

2 Toolbar actions
Provides eight main types of graphics editing tools: File , Printing, toolbar, tools, display tools, basic drawing tools, and
primitive tags toolbar toolbar, properties, tools, equipment entity. Device Diagram toolbar as shown in the figure on it is not a tool,
but as a conceptual tool.

2.1 File and print tools

File and print tools , Its function is simple, are as follows:

New graphics: use this tool to create a graphic, prior to making specific entities, you must first set on this graphic. Setting
procedure see property as described in the toolbar.

Open graphics: use this tool to scan the graphics path, all suffixes graph Graphics files, a file selection box lists.

Store graphics: using this tool will save the current figure, if it is a new file, you will be prompted to enter a new file
name, if you do not enter graph Suffixes are added automatically.

Save as: use this tool to save the current image as a graphic.

Print settings: use this tool to make print settings, you can select a printer and paper settings.

Print Preview: print preview with this tool.

Printing: print using the tool for graphics. For the convenience of printing, the system will automatically modify the graphic
background to print white, so white is not the final figure in the drawing.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 34/126
1/10/2017 <br>
background to print white, so white is not the final figure in the drawing.

2.2 Entity tool

Primitive tools include basic primitive tools, tags, primitive tools, and primitive equipment tools. First when the drawing to
select an entity, an entity the entity must be selected in the sidebar, and then hold down the left mouse button in the drawing area and
drag the mouse, select an appropriate size, release the left mouse button, you can create an entity. For device entity entity selecting
the toolbar, you can also directly in the drawing area, click the left mouse button, you can create an entity. But for a line entity
operation is different, such as polygon, power cables and other, in the inflection point by clicking the left mouse button, click the
right-end.
After selecting entity, entity on the mouse stays on for a while, will come out of the entity's information.

2.2.1 Basic primitive tools

Basic toolbar , These entities are static in the graphic does not change, can only do simple
property settings, such as font, color, style.

Options:
Which you can use when drawing district entity on the screen as the current editor of entities. Select " Select " Hou,
the mouse changes into an arrow-like, moving off on top of the entity, click the left mouse button to complete selecting entities
operate. Selected entity appear around several small rectangles, by dragging the small rectangle can change the size of the entity.
Selected you can move, delete, and modify the properties of the entities. You can also select multiple entities to operate. Methods of
selecting multiple entities are:

1. In selecting entities and hold down the Shift key, select all of the entities of the same type on the screen.

2. In selecting entities and hold down the Ctrl key.

3. Drag the left mouse button, create a rectangle box. Release the mouse, entities in the rectangle will be selected.

4. direct holding down Ctrl+ key combination to select all entities on the screen.

Clears the currently selected entity in two ways: one is a mouse click on the empty space of the picture, the second is Esc key
to clear.

Direct line: Use this tool to make a straight line.

Line:
Use this tool to make a line, you can turn the entity mapping is: click the left mouse button, and then drag the mouse
when you need to turn left, where need ends, click the right mouse button to complete.

Rectangle: Use this tool to make a rectangle.

Fills a rectangle: Use this tool to make the fill rectangle.
Ellipse: Use this tool to make fill an ellipse or a circle.
Fill an ellipse: Use this tools fills an ellipse or a filled circle.
Open arc: Use this tool to make the arc.
Polygon : Use this tool to make a polygon, method of making the same line.
Filled polygon: Use this tool to make filled polygons, method of making the same line.
Text: Use this tool to make a text object. Display object can support multiple lines of text.
Bitmap: Use this tool to make a static Gif format bitmaps.
2.2.2 Marker toolbar

Marker toolbar These entities can do simple

Property setting, also need to do some settings (described below in the property settings section) allows for operation or data
displayed.

Function button : Use this tool to make buttons, click the button to provide information such as graphics go,
Audio return, clear the Flash function.

Play button: Use this tool to make buttons, click the button in the image based on the original play
A new graphics window. Not recommended for use.

Bar graph: Use this tool to make bar graph.

Pie chart: Use this tool to make a pie chart.
Dynamic tags : You can use this tool to make a show of telemetering, remote letter, remote and other data
To remember. Telemetry, remote pulse in text display, remote display with a small, round, and support in the form of alarm window to
display. For alarm window can also provide a container for optical card index.

Protective equipment: Use this tool to make a protection device, you can select a background picture, providing
Nurse-returning function.

Nine-zone diagram: use this tool to make a VQCThe nine-zone diagram. Can displayVQC
Fitness. Include the reactive current, voltage, power factor values, you can also display the next work trends.

2.2.3 Equipment tools

Equipment entities for the toolbar And as shown in the following figure. Equipment entities is quite frequently used in
graphics primitives, mainly used to make the wiring diagram of the system. In the figure below, you can select the following equipment:

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 35/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 1

1)
Single-ended auxiliary equipment:
use the tool only electricity of terminals suitable for making a device, such as the PT. Main
connection there will be various combinations of capacitors, reactors and other entities not classified and can be defined according to
the Terminal is single-ended auxiliary equipment or double-ended auxiliary equipment.
2)
Double-ended auxiliary equipment:there are two terminals using the tool suitable for the production of electrical equipment, such
as CT.

3) Grounding symbols:use this tool to make the grounding element.

4)
Switch:
use this tool to make the switch or breaker switch, breaker switch, the system is treated as a device. Property settings
are detailed in the sections below.
Switch:use this tool to make switch.
5)

Double ring transformer:use this tool to make dual ring transformer.

6)

7) Three-coil transformer: use this tool to make three circuits of transformers.

8) Reactor: use this tool to make reactors.

9) Capacitors: use this tool to make capacitors.

10) Lightning arrester: use this tool to make lightning arresters.

11) Arc: use this tool to make arc-suppression coil, is generally not used.

12) Fuse: use this tool to make fuses.

13) Virtual device: use this tool to create a virtual device, refers to the actual system of virtual equipment does not have the right

equipment to correspond, but need to display data or control of the object, such as plate, etc.
14)
Five protection devices:use this tool to make ground, Web portals and other five protection devices.
15)
Tone marks:
making tone mark in the symbol-editing with this tool, used in online operation the tone of the show, this flag needs
tone editing and associated brand.
Other equipment entities are:

Power connector:
Use this tool to make the power connection line, making the same basic element line of production, more
special is that it can only be a straight line. Power cable is primarily used to connect two devices at a time, in running condition,
based on actual equipment charged state and location of dynamic coloring power connector.

Bus: Use this tool to make buses, bus-only line.

Line: Using the tool production line, production process and power connectors. Difference is, when after putting on line of
power, in the first end of the line will automatically draw arrows to indicate the power flow. Head end was finger painting line is the
first point.
Screen painting equipment entities in the process, in addition to the virtual device, outside the five-prevention equipment, power
cables, lines, and automatically adds a device to the real-time library table, delete the equipment entity will also remove its
corresponding device from the real-time library. But not on the screen changes immediately reflected in real time, but when you save the
graphic will only be variations to the current graphics device in real time. Therefore, when equipment entities in the graphics editor
add, delete, properties and other operations, in addition to the need to save the graphics, you need real-time data backup library. Data
backup is a real-time database storage process to a commercial database, you may need a certain amount of time, there is no need for
frequent backup operations, as long as you don't exit the system, real-time database data is held in memory, so only when you exit the
system in real time, according to the actual need to do data backups. In order to prevent emergency situations cause the machine loses
power, of course, in data backup interval is appropriate.

2.3 Actions toolbar

Operation is aimed at graphics tools section currently selected entities, select a method in the basic entity of the entity
described in the sidebar. Some operations, such as various alignment actions is the first choice of entity as the reference entity, so
when selecting entities should use the Ctrl key combined with the mouse to select the do not use box selection.

Specific tools are as follows:

Cancel: Use the tool to cancel the last action in a sequence of graphics operations.
Repeat : Use this tool will repeat the sequence of operations which has been cancelled in the last operation.
Delete: use this tool to delete the selected entities, or directly use DeleteKey.
Copy: use this tool to copy the selected entities ( Ctrl+C)
Paste: use this tool to paste the copied entities ( Ctrl+V) Paste the location is near the copied object.

Left-aligned: Use the tool to the selected entities to the first entity as a reference object to the left edge of the selected
snap operation.

Right align: Use this tool to the selected entity to entity as a reference of the first selected objects align to the right
actions.

Align: Use the tool to the selected entities to the first entity is selected as a reference on the object boundary alignment
actions.

Align bottom: Using the tool to the selected entity to entity as a reference of the first selected objects align to the bottom
border operations.

Vertical align: Use this tool to the selected entity to entity as a reference of the first selected object vertically centers
the alignment.

Horizontal align: Use this tool to the selected entity to entity as a reference of the first selected object horizontally
centers the alignment.

Front: When the entity when there is overlap, use this tool to the selected entities to the front.
Rear: When the entity when there is overlap, use this tool to the selected entities to the back.
Average vertical spacing: Use this tool to select the vertical spacing of the entities of the same.
Average spacing: Use this tool to select the horizontal spacing of the entities of the same.
Width: Using the tool to the selected entities to the first selected entities of the entity as a reference object-width
operation.

Height: Used the tool to the selected entities to the first entity selected as the reference object for entities such as
operation.

g
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 36/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Entity combinations: use this tool to select operation of entities into a whole. Shortcut key for g.
Ungroup: use this tool to split modules. Restore as a single entity. Shortcut keys for the u.
Rotation: Use this tool to rotate the selected entities, perspectives can be customized.
Replacement of components appearance: Use this tool to select the appearance of the equipment to be replaced.
The above described, and primitive operations include moving, changing size. Move the mouse above the selected entities when the
mouse shape becomes a double four-headed arrow, drag the mouse, pixel has moved, through the top, bottom, left and right arrow keys to
nudge the selected entity. When the mouse is moved to the selected entities when around the rectangular bounding box of the mouse shape
depending on the location and there are arrows in opposite directions, drag the mouse in that direction, can change the size of the
entity.

2.4 The property inspector

Properties tool bar can be the current choice of primitive simple property is set, the properties shared by that entity. Are:

Line color:
Use this tool to set the line color or the line color of the border of the entities. But for the line, Busbar,
power connector color coloring dynamically at runtime, the color setting is invalid.

Fill color: Use this tool to color or set background fill color of the entities.
Text color: Use this tool to set the text color.
Font : Use this tool to set the text font.
Graphics properties: Use this tool to set the current graphics properties. Sets the interface is as follows,

2 2

Set includes graphic, chart types, associated substation. Figure size is measured in pixels, corresponding to the monitor
resolution. Chart type is mainly to distinguish the main wiring diagram, wiring diagram for type graphics, mainly has the following
characteristics:
1 ) When you add, delete, modify equipment, real-time database are add, delete, modify the operation of the device.

2 ) Must be the primary graphics connection relationship generating topological connections of the wiring diagram.

3 ) At run time, set if the remote control can be made.

There is no difference between other types of recommended " Interval " type. In a project, it is best to only one type of
connection's graphic, but it's not absolute according to wiring can have more than one type of graphics, but it must be noted that the
above characteristics.
Create a new graphic, chart type and associated station must be set up before you paint it, otherwise it will prompt to red.

End arrow : Use this tool to set the line end arrow shape.
Line width: Use this tool to set the lines or the width of the border.
The arrowhead at the end: Use this tool to set the arrowhead at the end of a line shape.
These properties except for the graphics properties, you can select more than one entity set the batch property.

2.5 Show tool bar

Display tool of main contents are:

Zoom: you can use this tool to enlarge the graphic.

Zoom out: using this tool shapes can be reduced.

Standard: use this tool to zoom in or zoom out graph returns to its original size.

Entity location: use this tool to search for graphics entities positioning.

Display settings: use the tool mainly to equipment terminals, data, labels, display settings, set the interface as follows.

2 3

Display terminals: use this tool to control whether the display device terminal.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 37/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Display terminals: use this tool to control whether the display device terminal.

Displayed data: use this tool to control whether to display meta data.

Label: use this tool to control whether the display device entity tags.

Show grid: use this tool to control whether to use a grid. The grid spacing can be specified. When you draw grid will
automatically position the mouse position on the grid or grid, it does help to draw a straight line, but on a number of small entities,
choices will be difficult, at this point remove the grid display.

3 Property setting
In the property inspector, you can set some basic properties of the entity, the entity's properties as well as its role further
introduction. Different types of entities have different properties dialog box, in the figure above, double-click the left mouse button
to bring up the Properties dialog box.

3.1 Text properties dialog box

Contents of the text property is mainly text, the Properties dialog box is as follows, in which you enter needs to be displayed to,
needs to be wrapped directly enter. Color, font settings, see the property inspector.

3 1

3.2 Bitmap Properties dialog box

Bitmap attribute is a file selection dialog box, shown below, provides a preview of the file functions. This bitmap options
available in the system path $ (CSC2100_HOME)/project/ system resources / images.

3 2

3.3 Protection properties dialog box

Protection properties dialog box is as follows, in appearance, protective devices are expressed as background images, so the picture
selection of corresponding as closely as possible the actual shape of the device. Address must be 16 binary inputs. At run time, you can
click on the background image device return. Trend function is not enabled.

3 3

3.4 Nine-zone diagram properties dialog box

Nine-zone diagram properties dialog box shown in the following figure. A nine-zone diagram must correspond to a transformer, the
other is color settings, control and reference specific definitions see VQC parts.

3 4

3.5 The button Properties dialog box

Buttons, there are two: the function button and the play button. Play button is simple, the Properties dialog box is as follows,
below the coordinate set is not currently used, graphics by default placed in the middle of the screen that pops up. Defined in the name
of the button in the button text. Meaning of the three modes are:
1 ) Monochrome mode: the buttons in the conventional sense, the appearance of stereo effect. Color can be set through the property
inspector fill color.
2 ) Bitmap mode: The " bitmap selection " button select the bitmap as a background.

3 ) Text mode: the appearance of the button text-only.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 38/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Hot trends is to choose the button corresponding to the shape objectives, in running condition, click the button, a new window will
load the graphics display.
Set the text property of the button toolbars, button text does not currently support the wrap.

3 5

Function button Properties dialog box is as follows, basically content with the play button in the property page. Features
properties currently listed in the supported features. After you select a different function, there will be a brief description of the
function of the tip, in the bottom right of the text box when prompted to enter specific configuration. Main features are:
1 ) Graphics jump: another graphic in the same window.

2 ) Go to: in the same shape in the switch.

3 ) Remote reset 0 : On the specified remote reset project value is 0.

4 ) Remote reset 1 : On the specified remote reset project value is 1.

5 ) Remote reset against the specified remote reset project value is negated.

6 ) Protected revert: revert for specified protected, you can replace the functions of Protector entities.

7 ) Clear Flash interval: clearing the remote Flash within the specified interval.

8 ) Voltage pure Flash: to clear the remote signal within the specified voltage Flash.
9 ) Remote control: On the specified remote control (no need to return remote) for remote control. Such as the raising and lowering
of the transformer stalls, stops you can use this function.

10 ) Audio restoration: to return to the current voice alarm.

11 ) Electric flute testing: testing electric flute properly.

12 ) Bell test: testing the Bell is normal

13 ) Alarm reset: clear the alarm system, debugging phase.

14 ) Emergency review: manually-triggered emergency review.

3 6

3.6 Bar chart, pie chart properties dialog box

Bar graph Properties dialog is divided into two parts: basic properties and data definitions. Basic attributes shown in the
following figure. Y axis values are set in connection with specific data.

3 7

Bar graphs and pie charts exactly the same data definition properties dialog box, as shown in the following figure. Telemetry in the
left list, select telemetry, points add an arrow to the right of the list to the left, right arrow to move up and down arrows to adjust
the order of telemetry, color selection can be adjusted remote bar graph and display color in the pie chart.

3 8

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 39/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3.7 Dynamic tag attributes dialog box

Dynamic tag is a special entity, it can be displayed in various forms of telemetry, veins, remote data. Properties dialog box is as
follows, currently supported types are:

1 ) Telemetry: displays the telemetry data, you need to define an integer number of digits and decimals, name is automatically placed
on the value of the left. Numerical color set centrally by the graphics, you can distinguish between normal, more limited color,
value the background color can be set by the property inspector. If the value is larger than the defined number of digits, and
appears FFFF.

2 ) Remote Pulse: display remote pulse data, you need to define an integer number of digits and decimals, name is automatically
placed on the value of the left. Numerical color set centrally by the graphic, numerical background color can be set by the
property inspector. If the value is larger than the defined number of digits, and appears FFFF.

3 ) Remote: small circles to represent the remote works with a value name is automatically placed in a small circle on the right.
Small round fill color values defined by type of construction.
4 ) Alarm window: with a button shape to simulate the traditional alarm window, put the name in the middle button, support word wrap.
Engineering values to define the fill colors of a button you can press.
5 ) Alarm window containers: a button shape to simulate the alarm window index name in the middle button. Engineering values to
define the fill colors of a button you can press. The graphics for the hot spot is actually a container, as long as the hot
graphics in the alarm window, then the value engineering of the container is hot all the alarm window works in the graphic value
of or, that is, as long as there is a light plate for 1, the container 1. Click the alarm window container, you will jump to the
hot graphics. Containers can correspond to multiple hotspots graphic, which can define alarm window, and flexible indexing.
Name all types of colors and fonts can be set using the property inspector.
As shown in the following illustration, the name behind a select button, when checked, the name is automatically filled in,
principle is the name of the selected measuring points removal appliance name. Is not selected, then the name will not change, but can
be modified by hand.

3 9

Dynamic tag, there are two specific remote dynamic tags: total protection total protection alarm. As long as the remote dynamic tag
corresponding to the remote point is the system default " total protection event " and " total protection alarm " remote, tag names are
the " total protection event " and " total protection alarm ", the appearance is shown in the following figure.

3 10

These two particular dynamic of the main role is to replace the traditional alarm window, it remote signal type automatic search
system for " Protection of remote events " and " protect the remote signal alarm " remote, as long as there is one for the " protection
of remote events "(protection of remote alarm) projects for remote 1 , Then the " Securing the event total "(total protection alarm)
engineering dynamic tag value is an 1 , Small round the colors defined by the fill color change. As long as there is one for " protection
of remote events "(protection of remote alarm) remote signal alarm has not been confirmed, " securing the event total "(total protection
alarm) dynamic tag has not been confirmed, the button's border becomes red.
In running condition, when signals are both dynamic tags, click on marking of the current system or alarm signal from the interval
to a measured index automatically listed.

3.8 Device properties dialog box

Screen painting equipment entities in the process, in addition to the virtual device, outside the five-prevention equipment, power
cables, lines, and automatically adds a device to the real-time library table, delete the equipment entity will also remove its
corresponding device from the real-time library. Therefore, these property changes are also related to real-time database table changes.
As the device type is not the same, the specific property is not the same, but the setting process is consistent, here represented by
the switch, power cable do not have characteristic properties, this section focuses on switching, virtual devices, five property
settings for the device, the cabling.
Switch the Properties dialog box is divided into two parts: electrical properties and data definitions, as shown in the following
figure. Power properties are specific electric parameters, data is defined on the device matches the measuring points.

3 11

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 40/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 12

Five main device's properties dialog box is to five-figure matches an actual five-proof equipment, the establishment of five
protection devices is carried out in five anti-editing tools.
Virtual device attribute definition dialog box appears only if the data, data definitions similar to the switch, you can match the
telemetry and remote control, but do not support the matching remote.
Data in the line properties dialog box to define data definition similar to the switch, but only supports the matching remote. When
a line matches the type of telemetry for active or reactive power automatically in the first added line arrows to indicate trend
direction. And actually the opposite, you can line the " reversed " property settings to adjust.

3.9 Element attributes bulk changes

Graphics editing entity properties in bulk changes are very useful, in the property inspector, you can select entities in line
color, font, color, fill color, and volume settings. In addition, the graphics also provides a number of other property settings. Select
the entities that you want to modify, right mouse button in the blanks in the pop-up menu, select " graphic attributes bulk changes
"interface as shown in the following figure.
Bulk set of four attributes are currently supported:
Size: you can set the width and height of the entities and entity size changed, connector to merge / Disconnect the enabled state,
does not change the original connection.
Dispatch ID: principal for a set interval, must be switched as the Center because the switch number generally is based on the switch
for the extension, such as switch number 101 , The knife is 1011, Master knife 1012 Changes the switch number 102 yihou, online
automatic knives and knife number was changed to 1021 and 1022.
Voltage: uniform sets the voltage level of the selected device.
Dynamic tag: one is when you do not need to be tagged automatically when they defined the name of the production, batch can clear
the name of the tag. The other batch can set remote, light plate and color of the container.

3 13

3.10 Entities property storage

Properties of the above entities are stored in two places: graphics and real-time database. For entities other than equipment
entities, their properties are stored in the graphics file itself, including position, size, color, associated with measuring points. In
the graphic these messages may be logged when you save. Which entity is associated with a corresponding device in the real-time library,
equipment entities in the graphics stored only on its position, size, is associated with the device ID and other information, and device
specific information including device name, voltage levels and the associated points in real time. Therefore, the property is set to the
device entity in the graphics, in fact, are property is set to the library devices in real time. Such, dang a actual of equipment to in
main wiring figure and interval points figure Shang displayed, just to in main wiring figure Shang created the equipment and set good
property, in interval points figure in the created a equipment figure Yuan (note, this equipment figure Yuan does not in real-time
library in the created equipment), will this equipment figure Yuan and real-time library library in the of this equipment associated up,
is this equipment figure Yuan of property also on set completed has.

4 Graphic production
Graphics is using various combinations of entities in various forms, and the process of property of an entity. Develop good work
habits for fast, stable and beautiful graphics is very important, as far as possible in accordance with the following principles of
graphics:
Principle one: after the building. On more than one computer at the same time, the special avoid doing or for building and modifying
a library.
Principle II: done on a computer. Keep this graphic on your computer is current, synchronized to other computers by it.
Principle III: graphics in engineering, the equipment entity when you add, delete, and modify operations in the system before
exiting, to do data backups. Save library data in real time to the business, equipment and information added, deleted, modified or lost.
Principle IV: the typical interval, make a good interval, especially after the properties are set using interval matches will
significantly accelerate the pace of drawing and can guarantee the correctness of the graphics.
Principle five: graphics to note the overall layout, focus on equipment, such as transformers, feels full, to avoid top-heavy.

4.1 Entity making

Entity appearance is mainly divided into three types: line, polyline, rectangle. Introduced below:
Such entities include basic entity of the line straight, and primitive equipment in the bus. Entities in the sidebar select the
appropriate entity, mapping the mouse shape is a cross shape, hold down the left mouse button, drag towards the target direction, at the
end of the release button. You can use the grid to draw horizontal and vertical lines.
Polyline class entities include polylines, polygons, rectangles, filled polygon, power cables, lines. Entities in the sidebar select
the appropriate entity, mapping the mouse shape is a cross shape, click the left mouse button and drag, in need of the bend of the left
again, so can be turned in many places, and finally at the finish, click the right mouse button.
Other entities the entities belong to the rectangle class. Entities in the sidebar select the appropriate entity, mapping the mouse
shape is a cross shape, hold down the left mouse button and drag to adjust the size of the rectangle towards the target direction, at
the right end of the release button.
Equipment entities in addition to the rectangle class diagram element production method, there is a quick way in equipment entities
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 41/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Equipment entities in addition to the rectangle class diagram element production method, there is a quick way in equipment entities
after selecting entities in the sidebar, mapping the mouse shape is a cross shape, click the left mouse button, pixel size can be
defined in advance, right click in the drawing area menu " Component default size ", displays the interface as follows. These settings
are saved in the $(2100_HOME)/project/ system configuration /componentsize.ini file.

4 1

Equipment also provides a right-click menu to operate on equipment, when one entity is selected, mouse over the entity, the mouse
shape to a double arrow, right click, a menu appears, the contents of:
Associated with the existing equipment: equipment entities and real-time library associate a device one device of the same type.
Lifting device: the device entities associated with devices in real time expires.
Create devices based on image type and Associates: establishment of a real-time database with the same type of device, and device-
associated entities.
Device properties: displays the entities associated with the device's real time properties of the device in the library.
If it is a primitive hand-lifting device and associated equipment, this equipment is no longer in the graphics management within the
scope of, and must be managed on a device management. Delete a device on a graphics entity is not immediately deleted when the
corresponding equipment, when you exit the graphical editor or the current figure is closed only when the corresponding devices in real-
time database removed.
After the entity appears on the screen, you need to set its properties, mouse double-click entities enter its properties dialog box,
properties set described in the previous section.

4.2 Dynamic tag batch production

Dynamic marks in the interval map production is widely applied. In addition to the single produced by the method described above,
but also provide batch production method. Methods are as follows:
Select dynamic markings, mapping the mouse shape is a cross shape, hold down the left mouse button and drag to adjust the size of
the rectangle towards the target direction, release the left button at the right location, the following screen appears. In the list box
can be selected, after selecting the desired type of point and mark, OK to exit, you are prompted to define the number of columns.
System according to the measuring point number, column number, area calculations, determines the actual size and position of each
dynamic tag. As shown in the following figure.

4 2

4 3

4 4

4.3 Connection
Equipment entities has its own terminal definitions, graphics, to ensure the equipment between the entities, as well as equipment
and electric cables or lines between terminals and reliable connections. Between the two devices must be connecting through a power
cable. In the graphics editor, provides a disconnect / Merge connection line, the connector follows, coordinates the automatic correction
features to ensure reliable connection of terminals in the drawing.
Disconnect / Merge connection lines: when a two-terminal devices, such as switches, switch, when it is placed in an electrical
connector, the power connector is automatically disconnected when you move or delete the device, two power connectors are automatically
combined into one. In addition, if you put one end of the connector on the other connector, then the latter will automatically
disconnect.
Connection lines follow: when a terminal connection cables and equipment, mobile equipment, the connector will automatically follow.
Coordinates are automatically fixed: when moving an entity, if there can be connected to a Terminal, then it will automatically move
to the terminal connection. Conversely, if an entity has a terminal when there is a connection, when you use the arrow keys to nudge,
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 42/126
1/10/2017 <br>
to the terminal connection. Conversely, if an entity has a terminal when there is a connection, when you use the arrow keys to nudge,
because the presence of this feature, the entity is not moving. At this point should be moved by mouse.
Disconnect / Merge following connectors and connectors are mutually exclusive and cannot be used simultaneously, in the right-click
menu function switch. Both ends of the power connector can only be to connect other devices, so in the Middle power connector needs to
connect to the other device entity, make sure you disconnect / Merge connection lines feature is enabled, so you can automatically
connect the power cable disconnected.
Automatically produces graphical connection during the drawing process, or in the right-click menu, select " Recreate the graphics
connection ". Graphics connection refers to all equipment connections between entities, such as a switch and switch entity through a
power connector. Can be displayed in the sidebar " display terminals " tool to check the graphics connection, not connected to the
Terminal in the red box around Flash. If the connection error, you are prompted to recreate the graphics connection. If recreated after
the prompt connection error is likely to be some equipment such as transformer terminal definitions wrong. See also symbol-editing of
specific production method.
Only in the confirm connection is completely correct, the connection that is in line with the actual situation, as well as the
actual device matched the correct measuring points, in the right-click menu, select " Form a topological connections ", eventually
forming topological relations required for advanced applications, the actual connection between devices at a time.
Equipment matches the correct point consists of:
1 ) The switch, the switch must match the type of switch, switch remote signal.
2 ) Bus is a type that matches the voltage of the telemetry, and defines the voltage.

3 ) If there is a breaker switch, the device main switch type, subtype must be a breaker switch.

4.4 Interval matching

Interval matching is based on a graphic of a set with a good point entity as the source for replication, and then select the target
interval to match the copied entities at the same time, will look for the corresponding measuring points automatically in the target
interval matching to the new entity, so as to complete the automatic function.
Of a set with a good point entity can be thought of as an interval on the main wiring, then the matches at intervals in the main
wiring, equipment of the target interval is automatically created, electrical properties of the device will copy the source intervals
corresponding to the electric properties of the device, and is based on the measuring point of the source device to the new device
automatically.
Of a set with a good point primitives can also be understood as a has been making a good interval, making another of the same type
interval when using interval matching, in addition to complete the entity automatically points out, this interval graph equipment will
also be entities that correspondence is automatically replaced with the device. If the interval- 1 , a switching device the entities
associated with the switch 1. In the replication interval graph 2 Shi, the switching equipment entity will automatically switch 2
associate. But there is a premise, that is, switch 1 and switch 2 is in the main wiring diagram has been created, and had match point.

From the foregoing, interval matching function using fully depends on the source intervals measuring points have been correctly
matched. Therefore, in drawing, especially when the main draw connection, we recommend that you set up a completely typical intervals,
including by region set up the schedule number, device name, and then use the replication interval matching, and replication interval
use bulk attribute modifications to change the device name is very convenient.
Source can match the interval is the number of intervals.

4 5

4 6

4 7

4.5 File synchronization

In the right-click menu, select " File synchronization ", pop up the following screen. The current graphics and graphic resources as
a whole under the synchronize all offline files to other nodes on the network.
File synchronization is dependent FTP Services, please see the installation section of the maintenance manual.

4 8

4.6 Gallery of import, export,

Gallery can be understood as a template, you can draw some common forms of connection after exporting for Gallery and later
engineering making import using.
Gallery export: select needed export to Gallery in the graphic editing entities, right-click in the pop-up menu, select " Export " ,
you need to name the Gallery, Gallery store path defaults to $(CSC2100_HOME)/project/ Library resources.

Gallery importing: graphic editor, right-click in the pop-up menu, select " Import library " Gallery is a resource directory of all
gallery presents a graphical display, select the appropriate Gallery press OK. The Gallery content will be imported into the current
graphics, import locations can be controlled through the anchor points. The use of anchors see section below.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 43/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Gallery to import and match intervals should be used in conjunction, choose a suitable connection Gallery after import, should be
property, after the set, using the interval speed matching feature will speed up the drawing. Don't continuously make the same
connection Gallery in the form of import.

4.7 Anchor point uses

Anchor points used in the graphics editor, shown as a small red rectangle, you can through the right-click menu " Get the anchor
points " to find out. Anchor's primary role is to be an object copy, import, specify the new location of the object in the graph.
When the object copy is automatically an anchor point appears (this anchor can also be manually adjusted), the new object will be
copied here. After replication is completed, copy the anchor point will automatically navigate to the next point, are convenient to a

continuous replication source. Positioning point of principle is to ensure continuous replication of entity or entity combinations are
evenly spaced.

5 Symbol-editing
Equipment in the shape of the entities defined in the symbol editing done, click Start - > Application module - > Graphics system - >
Symbol-editing, running into edit, as shown in the following figure. Refers to the symbol-editing is also making graphics, just Board is
relatively small (400x400), which is the basic entity of. So many features in the sidebar and graphic editing in the same. Only elements
unique to edit all sections below.

5 1

Through the drop down list to select the type. If you want to type a new entity. Entities on the left margin of the list click the
right mouse button, pop-up component Edit menu, as shown in the figure, select the new entity. And then in the edit window for editing.
While entities can also be deleted, rename, export, import. Export entity default path for " library resources ".

5 2

Single-ended auxiliary equipment and double-connection diagram of auxiliary equipment for the main devices but do not have
corresponding and not vested in his category, in order to let the component devices in the main wiring diagram electrical of color set.
Single-ended auxiliary equipment and double-connection diagram of auxiliary equipment entities in the main building equipment for
instance is in the device. When the mouse is moved on its instances at run time is displayed when an instance of " name " and " type " .
Which single end auxiliary equipment and double end auxiliary equipment of " type " and other figure Yuan class different, other figure
Yuan class of type in displayed Shi is its figure Yuan class of class name (as: switch class of instance in mouse touches displayed Shi
its type is switch), and single end auxiliary equipment and double end auxiliary equipment of type is its equipment description (other
component class of equipment description in mouse touches displayed Shi is not displayed of), that is single end auxiliary equipment and
double end auxiliary equipment of " Type " can be customized.
Each entity has four States, each State corresponds to a shape. Switch and switch, 1 display position, 2 shows its location.
Displayed by default is 2 , which means that switch and switch if there is no distribution points are displayed. Other entities are
displayed by default is 1, so for the other without coordination entities should be graphics drawn in State 1. If it is a pair of remote
locations, switch or switch normally open contact (position) remote signal type to circuit breaker or switch as the primary remote ; the
normally closed contact (position) remote signal type to universal remote as auxiliary remote signal . Primary remote and the secondary
remote signal and correspond to the four shown in the table below.
Table 5 1

Master Secondary
remote remote
1 1 0

2 0 1
3 0 0

4 1 1

When the monitor is run, according to entities associated with the actual situation, to decide a State of display editing. So, when
users customize their electrical equipment, only need to build a new entity component that is associated with an entity in your graphics
editor and replace.
Terminal
Each utility is terminal equipment, Terminal is in generating topological connections and graphic editing. When the two terminals of
the two devices when you get very close, or by power connector joins, the system sees the two devices for electrical connection.
According to the actual shape to define the Terminal position of the entity.
Voltage identification
In symbol-editing equipment entities are basic primitives such as lines, rectangles, filled rectangle, these basic primitives will
be run in accordance with unit belongs to the voltage level dynamic shading. But for three circuits of transformers (or transformer) in
electrical coloration due to display three (or two) voltage, thus in the entity and other entities on the drawing is different. Voltage
level must be defined in each entity. Choose the basic entity, double cross in the mouse arrow, right-click, the following interface:

5 3

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 44/126
1/10/2017 <br>
At entities in accordance with the actual location of the transformer voltage for each basic entity ID, other types of entities at
each end is a voltage, so the default is N For three circuits of transformers, must also distinguish between its terminal voltage, but
the terminals no voltage identification. Therefore, when making a three-coil transformer, requiring a basic entities and terminals have
a cross, then the voltage identification of terminals depends on the voltage identification of the basic entities.
As mentioned above, equipment entities in running condition will be based on the actual voltage level of color, but in some areas
there will be equipment entities of shape and color standards, and does not allow to change at run time. In this case, you can use the
filled polygon to draw. Only fills polygons in running condition does not do dynamic coloring, and retain their original colors.

6 Equipment management
In the graphics editor, equipment entity is associated with the equipment together, therefore, full equipment can be managed in the
graphic editing. But because of equipment entities can and may disassociate the device, so that there will be some excess equipment. It
is necessary to have a separate device management applications. Click on start -> application -> database management -> device
management, interface as follows.

6 1

In the tree on the left, select " Plant " node table has records of the current substation on the right. Select the following "
General equipment within the station ," Shi, collection of all devices are listed in the table on the right site. Can be operated via a
right-click menu on the device, as shown in the following figure.

6 2

General property settings on the device with the settings for graphics editing. Only property requires a set of substation
equipment, interface is as follows, mainly sets the voltage level substation.

6 3

Device topology the following node there are two nodes that need attention: device connection topology of relational tables and
equipment total tables. Equipment is recorded in a joined relationship table in the graphics editor " form the topological connection "
results. Device summary table is a collection of all types of devices.

7 Frequently asked questions answered

Q1 Graphics match point is not.

There may be configuration tools make real-time changes, and click The " publish " button cause, close the current file, open it
again.
Q2 : Create device system without a reboot.

Created during the graphic editing equipment, data backup is needed, that is stored in the database. Otherwise exit the system,
these devices will be lost.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 45/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Q3 : Check connection when prompted to rebuild the connection, still do so after rebuilding tips.
Entities may be equipment terminal error, especially the terminals of the transformer, make sure the Terminal is defined according
to the requirements of the transformer voltage identification. (See symbol-editing).
Q4 : Tuyuankujia contains an error.

Is likely to create a new entity, or when you modify the entity names, names with a space in the middle.
Q5 : Equipment entities right-click menu are dimmed, and inoperable.

Graphics property setting does not have an associated substations.

Q6 : The new version of the program after the upgrade dynamic tags, button shape change.

In the original version of the program, dynamic marks, text size is dependent on the entity size of the button, the new version
relies on the font for the text size setting. You can modify the configuration to determine the dependencies. $(CSC2100_HOME)/project/
system configuration /GraphProperty.ini adjust the isBMFontDisplayByRect property to TRUE Can be.

The fifth chapter Database editing

Directory

1PROTECTION TEMPLATE MANAGEMENT
1.1DEVICE TEMPLATES

1.2MEASURE WORD TEMPLATE

2REAL-TIME DATABASE CONFIGURATION TOOL

2.1RENAMED SUBSTATION

2.2ADD INTERVAL

2.3DELETE INTERVAL

2.4INTERVAL MATCHING

1 Protection template management

Click on the protected template management menu, enter the protected template library interface, seen in the figure below 11 As
shown in. Template library there are three nodes, respectively recorded device templates, template and measure Word template.

1 1

1.1 Device templates

Double-click when you can see the existing device templates, select a template by right-clicking, seen in the figure below 12 Shown
in menu descriptions below the main menu items one by one.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 46/126
1/10/2017 <br>
in menu descriptions below the main menu items one by one.

1 2

1.1.1 Four remote

As shown in the following figure, click on a device under device templates node of the tree on the left side, can be seen in the
form on the right side of the device remote option. This is equivalent to CSC2000 the device templates list, but here are separate.
Physical quantity called the manually entered; after the feature is to double-click the drop down select, address 1,2,3,4 is split
control named in the Statute in the past (for example: remote DIG010203 Split address corresponds to a 01 (Group), the addresses
corresponding to two 02 (Offset), San 03 (Offset), addresses the four fill 0 ; Telemetry ANA4005 Split address corresponds to a 40 Address
corresponds to the second 05 , Add three, four filling 0 ; Remote control the same way. ) Modified to right mouse button Choose Save when
finished, otherwise regarded as invalid.

1 3

1.1.2 CPU list

The value of this option is equivalent to the original engineer station list. Right margin button to select " Add CPU", as shown
below. CSL101A , for example, CPU type dropdown select the type code, such as high frequency CPU for 28,CPU index complete CPU number 1,
names fill out the CPU name, such as high CPU, now tentatively scheduled for the number 6 And cannot be changed. Selected recent
increases in CPU click CPU value, can check out the CPU setting template. Value can also be set through the menu template management
access.

1 4

If adding new templates set values, required through the right-click menu option to add in the left box, then enter a value type,
double-click the new value type, just on the right side enter line by line in the empty table generated serial number, value, value
range, and value codes, each need to enter one by one is not allowed to be empty. Blank lines are not allowed in the middle. The
following figure.

1 5

1.1.3

Click Options, pop-up dialog box equivalent to the past 27 Message list right-click, pop-up floating menu, copy, paste, delete, save,
4 Options.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 47/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 6

1.1.4 Alarm

Click on the alarms option, a pop-up dialog box equivalent to the past 28 Message list right-click, pop-up floating menu, copy,
paste, delete, save, 4 Options.

1 7

1.1.5 Event alarm management

Used to make a new alarm template, right-click a blank spot for added protection type code, type in the input window, enter the new
code, double-click the add node, on the right of the empty table that pops up fill in, note that the content must be written in the text
field.

1 8

1.1.6 Edit

For the template name, protection type code changes.

1 9

1.1.7 Increase

As shown in the figure below, the template used to add a new list.

1 10

1.1.8 Find:

Used to find the template in the tree on the left. Enter the name or abbreviation of name, you can navigate to related templates in
the tree on the left.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 48/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 11

1.2 Measure Word template

When the information in the configuration editor, often encounter quantifiers are not words used or not what users want, and will
require additional quantifiers. Specific method is to open the " protection template gallery management " , click on the upper left
corner of the box " measure Word template ", add a new pop-up table on the right, and quantifiers.

1 12

2 Real-time database configuration tool

2.1 Renamed substation
As shown in the figure below, once you have successfully installed the first time you start the configuration tool, you can see in
the " Substation " tree node " XXX " And a " global variable " tree node in a substation building substation was determined after the
name, right-click " XXX "-" Rename ", enter the name of the substation, subsequent operations are conducted under this tree node is
modified. Substations do not allow new and delete operations. Substation name cannot be longer than 8 characters.

2 1

After renaming the result, as shown in the following figure.

2 2

2.2 Add interval

Complete transformer substation after renaming, you can add interval in interval operation in a substation, the function is done
through the right-click menu. In substation of the interval tree node, right-click menu, enter the interval in the corresponding
interface information, determined to complete adding an interval.

2 3

If every copy, add intervals the pop-up interface selection " Application templates ", the following stations and intervals will
become valid, select the substation and the determined interval.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 49/126
1/10/2017 <br>
become valid, select the substation and the determined interval.
Increasing virtual points, to select " Virtual space ", this later intervals ahead will be (empty) comment, click into the virtual
space, blank table added to the right of the name, choose the corresponding types, and under the left enabled attribute, select "
virtual remote signal (measured) flag " it was determined that the virtual point is valid.

2.3 Delete interval

As shown in the following figure, when after the interval tree select the node you want to delete using the right mouse button menu,
select the delete confirmation dialog box will appear after the interval, if deleted, appropriate interval in the configuration will be
deleted, and the intervals of four remote information will be automatically deleted.

2 4

2.4 Interval matching

After the interval has been added, tree nodes right-click Select intervals match the corresponding interval, interval matches the
interface will pop up.

2 5

In the intervals match the left side of the interface " Interval belongs to protect " click the right mouse button add device on the
primary node, as you can see, " added protection " and " Add 61850 Device " The two menu items.

2 6

2.4.1 Added protection

In the pop-up menu, select " Add protection ", this time you choose to protect the information interface will pop up, enter the
device address in the interface, select the device type and click OK.

2 7

2.4.2 Add 61850 devices

In the pop-up menu, select " Add 61850 Device "When will pop up 61850 Device selection screen ( Add 61850 devices, first make sure the
installation directory of the Project/Device Directory has the following corresponding 61850 devices and remote file exists

DevTab.txt

AnalogTab.txt
ControlTab.txt
DigitTab.txt
ProtEventTab.txt
AlarmTab.txt
PulseTab.txt( no remote pulse of the file may not exist)

These files are made " Configuration tool " Through a series of 61850 configuration provides.

The following figure, in the selection screen, select Add 61850 Device, and OK to exit.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 50/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 8

2.4.3 Four away matches

Add steps above, then you will see interval matching interface in the left tree nodes have been added the device of your choice, and
expand the node under which the four remote information can be seen, this time can be " >> " ( Add select four remote points on the left
side to the right side ) , " << " ( Delete select four remote points to the right ) , " >>> " ( Add node on the left side all the contents of
the book ) , " <<< " ( Delete all nodes in the tree to the right ) The four function buttons you can easily complete the required four remote
points of added and removed.

2 9

Add complete, final figure in the tree on the right side shows the amount of points is the need of four remote points. Determined
after the exit, these information will be added to the configuration tool by category four remote quantum nodes under the corresponding
interval.
Pictured below, interval after the match is completed, in the remote measurement node tree, double-click, add in the table on the
right shows the protection or 61850 Remote measurement of device information.

2 10

2.4.4 Four remote property modification

2 11

As shown in the figure, interval after the match is completed, four remote volume information is available through " Properties
dialog box " pop-up menus to accomplish some specific settings. Most of these items by label in the Properties dialog box can
understand, here's " alarm set " and " alarm type " these two functions;
Alarm type: if it is the default, this point belongs to the alarm when the alarm type is based on the control type derived from a
match, otherwise, from the types of alerts that you have defined ( Related settings in the real-time alarm box ) Select one for the alarm.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 51/126
1/10/2017 <br>
match, otherwise, from the types of alerts that you have defined ( Related settings in the real-time alarm box ) Select one for the alarm.

Set alert actions:

If it is by default, the corresponding alert actions are based on the alarm type containing the matching set alert actions ( Related
settings in the real-time alarm box ) Alarm, otherwise it is from the predefined alert actions ( Alarm box in real time-related settings,
such as whether to display alarm, whether filing, bells, flute and so on ) Select the corresponding alert actions.

In addition, the point attribute changes can be modified through the properties bar at the bottom of the table ( Figure below ) , And
properties box is where changes need to be saved after changes are completed before it can take effect.

2 12

Note:
Telemetry: the original value * Coefficient + Offset =Project value;

Remote Pulse:
Collection number: add back cumulative pulse form,
For example: on the end of a table X This sends pulses n , The coefficients s

Symbol power =X+n*s

Collection number: add back cumulative kilowatt-hour meter

For example: on the end of a table X This sends power y

Symbol power X+y

Symbol Pulse: pulse tables do not need to add back

Such as: sending pulses n , The coefficients s

Symbol power =n*s

Sign of power: do not need to add back the watt-hour meter

Given power to sign on electricity

2.4.5 Remove device

If you want to remove in the interval matching matching protection or 61850 Device, as shown below, match the tree on the left side
of the interface to the device contacts, right-click and select delete protected and confirmed by the confirmation dialog box that pops
up, you can from the spacing and position the device and the device has been added to four remote points in the configuration details
are deleted.

2 13

2.4.6 Delete and add four remote information points

When you complete the protection and 61850 Device added, needs to be removed from the remote when individual four remote information
points, in addition to using 29 " << " Delete button, you can also open four remote quantum interval tree node node, through the
configuration tool to delete rows from the table on the right side menu to finish.

2 14

2.4.7 Add extended alarms table

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 52/126
1/10/2017 <br>
2.4.7 Add extended alarms table

Extended alarm's main function is the telemetry limit or modification time of the remote (timing) or the cumulative number of times
(including) the alarm again. Main method is needed for time alarm alarm or meter telemetry or remote point added to the extended alarms
table, and then modify the properties, as described in the following:
1 . Added to the alert extension table

At a selected interval belongs to telemetry, remote telemetry, remote table or node, right left key select the telemetry or remote
point in the table, right-click menu has " Adding to the extended alarms table " menu item.

2 15

Through it, telemetry, or remote signal increased to extended alarms table.

2 . Modify an alert extended properties

Select counters in the left tree node alarm, in the table on the right lists all counters that have been added to the extended
alarms table alarms, set properties by right-clicking the corresponding property, as shown below:

2 16

Of which:
a) Association types and associated ID that this counters the telemetry or remote signaling point associated

b) Statistic type: set to normal requirements

c) Meter set alert actions

That which counts points after a specified number of alerts the alert actions for the set, if set to default, said its alert
actions set for the corresponding remote meter or alarm remote meter type the associated alert actions.
d) Timing set alert actions

After the time exceeds the specified time counters for alert the alert actions for the set, if set to default, said its alert
actions set for the corresponding remote timer or remote signaling of alarm time alarm type is associated.
e) ( Caps ) account limit:

Correspondence to remote points is set to remote signals remote modification limits on the number of
Such as correspondence for telemetry, telemetry points set to more limits on the maximum number of
If set to 0 Indicates that this function (corresponding here total time) not in

f) ( Caps ) account limit:

Correspondence to remote points is set to remote-remote modification limits on the number of

Such as correspondence for telemetry, telemetry points set to lower limits on the number of
If set to 0 Indicates that this function (corresponding to the points described below) are operational

g) ( Cap ) time limit (in seconds):

Correspondence to remote points is set to remote signals remote signal accumulation time limits
Such as correspondence for telemetry, telemetry points set to the maximum cumulative time limit
If set to 0 Indicates that this function (corresponds to the total described below) are operational

h) ( Cap ) time limit (in seconds):

Correspondence to remote points is set to remote signals remote signal accumulation time limits
Such as correspondence for telemetry, telemetry points set to minimum time limits
If set to 0 Indicates that this function (corresponds to the total described below) are operational

i) Statistics for the total time:

Available settings for the statistics or by hours, days, years and other statistics. Statistics that accumulates the number of
(can be manually zeroed in the library to browse in real time) and other statistics the statistics period cumulative number, zero out
of each survey period starting. For example, daily statistics, only the number of statistics every day this time, automatic zero reset
every day.
j) Timed statistical methods:

Available settings for the statistics or by hours, days, years and other statistics. Statistics time time has been added (can be
manually zeroed in the library to browse in real time), and other statistics the statistics period of expansion time time has been
added to each survey period starting zero. For example, daily statistics, only this time time of day cumulative daily automatic zero
zero.
k) Audio file:

Used to set the counters when the corresponding alarm files, according to the associated alert actions is not set set voice alarm
voice files.
l) Enabled property (check is enabled, otherwise it is not statistics):

Total time: alarm remote signal order of precedence, telemetry, the maximum number alarm function;
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 53/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Total time: alarm remote signal order of precedence, telemetry, the maximum number alarm function;
Meter: alarm-remote order of precedence, telemetry, the minimum number of alarm inputs;
Total: remote point-in-time warning function, telemetry, the maximum cumulative time alarm function;
Timing: remote time alarm function, telemetry floor time alarm function;
Total automatic reset: select automatic zeroing ( Upper limit ) More limit alarm, automatic count number to zero. For example limited
value set for 3, away letter collection bit meter times times for 2, as at away letter again occurred collection bit, is will for away
letter meter times more limited alarm, as set for automatically clear 0: is this away letter points again occurred collection bit
modification Shi of collection bit meter times times for 1, as not set for automatically clear zero, This remote point displacement-
meter count is 4.

Meter automatic reset: refer to total time to zero.

Total is automatically cleared when you: refer to total time to zero.
Timing automatic reset: refer to total time to zero.
Repeat alarm limit for the total time: statistical collection during the period / The maximum number the more alarm collection
again after / Upper limit alarm again, select this feature if no selection total time to zero.

Repeat alarm meter time limit: the statistics window / The lower number the more alarm points again after / The floor again after the
alarm, choose this premise does not select the function of the meter is automatically cleared.
m) Timing statistics type:
Today Statistical period of all remote / More caps, telemetry / The lower limit of cumulative time statistics.

Single meter Statistical period occurred within a single remote / More caps, telemetry / The minimum time for timing statistics.
3 . Examples

a) Meter alarm:

Requirements: every spring is not storage for alarm signal occurs three times, more than three times again, alarm
Practice: selected Spring does not reserve to join extended alarms table, set its properties as follows,
Total time limit: 3 , Meter time limits, the total ceiling, time limit is set to the 0 Include statistical methods is set to
every day, enabling property only for the total time, limit the total time repeat alarm two selected, other items are not
selected.
b) Timer alarm

Requirements: for each bus voltage limit for more than 5 Minutes of an alarm, the more time than 2 Minutes of an alarm.

Procedure: select the bus voltage is added to the extended alarms table, set its properties as follows,
Total time limit, the meter time limit are set to 0 , Total time limit for 300 , Time limit for 120 Including statistics mode
set to statistics, when the enabled property only for the total energy, timing separately, select, other items not chosen
timing statistics type, select single.
Note: the same point simultaneously timed, accounting and statistics.

2.4.8 61850 devices

Interval matching 61850 Device to add, delete, and 61850 Device remote deletion of information, will the program installation
directory project/deviceman Subdirectory corresponding mapping file. Several output files in a directory are described below:

strDev.txt61850 Unit mapping table

analog.txt61850 Unit of telemetering data mapping table

digit.txt61850 Device remote mapping table

pulse.txt61850 Device remote pulse mapping table

relay.txt61850 Device remote control mapping table

After the completion of operation such as add, delete, and corresponding action accordingly in the mapping file, such as: Add 61850
Device is successful, 61850 Remote device and device mapping information will increase to strDev.txt File. The files be saved in a
commercial database. With each configuration starts is read from the database.

2.4.9 Edit information

Click on the established interval, there will be four remote display, and can be edited in the right box for each point, double-
click the names can be renamed. Drag a copy of the support, or right-click to select Properties dialog box to define.
Note: before you modify the finished page, and will definitely order save, refresh. Closes dialog box asking whether to save back to
business: If save is saved to the hard drive, but will be a long time. Do not save all data in real-time ( memory ). Modifying and
deleting points in the table is the work we used to do, so you can streamline database, easy to see and save memory, improving speed.
When you edit the control point name should avoid commas name, such as " I , II " The words. Because in real time when you export the
file, each column is separated by a comma between the column name comma may cause errors. This problem does not appear in the real-time
database export, but appears in the real-time database imports.
When editing information, often encounter words enough or cannot find the words they want, at this time we should increase the
quantifier. Template view instructions specific protection management related content.

2.4.10 Forms-related features

Interval matching function button of the left corner of the form on the right side of the interface as shown below:

2 18

Publishing : Release updates the database to avoid data information is not synchronized.

Hide columns: because the table items around a long, hidden columns, select the types of data we want to see, you can simplify the
table;

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 54/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 19

2.4.11 Time table

After you open the table, pop-up floating menu by right-clicking on the right, select the Properties dialog box, as shown in the
following figure.

2 20

2 21

Table property is set, you can set, total number of time periods, currently editing time, start time, end time, type and ratio
settings.

2.4.12 Formula sheet

After turning on the formula sheet, pop the floating menu by right-clicking on the right, select the Properties dialog box, as shown
in the following figure.

2 22

2 23

Formula property is set, the formula name, triggering cycles VQC Set options such as private.

Define a new formula: add formulas in the right click menu. As shown in the following figure, in the pop-up enter the formula name
dialog box, enter the new definition.

2 24

After you enter the formula in the name, and click OK. Begins the definition of a formula in the above IF,THEN,ELSE, setting the
formula property 4 pages, each page includes operators, limit values, a logical value, select variables.

The steps to building a formula:

Enter " IF Parts " Page, click the new button, appears as shown in the following figure.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 55/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Enter " IF Parts " Page, click the new button, appears as shown in the following figure.

2 25

Click the operator drop down box to select a logical operator.

2 26

Will be displayed in the formula editor area appears if you select interface as shown in the following figure.

2 27

Click on the left side of the operator " (<>) " Nodes can continue to select an operator, design complex logical operations.
Expression "(<>)" node represents an unknown expression needed to be input. Double click on the selected "(<>)" node, directly in the pop-
up dialog box, enter the expression. Or formula node is selected in the following illustration, by " variable " from the table, select
the corresponding logic points formula.
No confirmed the expression " (<>) " Node, click the Add button. Expression is automatically added to the bottom of the list.

IF Conditional expressions using expressions to replace " (<>) " Node, if it is not completed by the operator by selecting enter a
criteria expression, said the conditions are equal "==" rather than "=",

Such as: IF(@D5040==(@D5041)

This requires special attention.

Enter " THEN Parts " Page, click the new button, click the operator drop down box to select the operator, operators are described
below
Table 2 1

Operator Introductions

LOCK([ parameter ],[ Latching device operators

operating parameter 2]) ( VQC Use)

UNLOCK([ parameter ],[ Unlock the device

operating parameter 2]) operator ( VQC Use)

DO([ remote ID32],[ Remote control operators

operating parameter 2])

DELAY([ delay time Delay operator

seconds])

([Variable ])=( Expression) The assignment operator

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 56/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 28

No confirmed the expression " (<>) " Node, click the Add button. Expression is automatically added to the bottom of the list.

" ELSE Parts " Page actions with "THEN some " page.

Note that in the " ELSE Parts " And " THEN Parts " Through an assignment statement assigns a value format: variable =Value.
IF(@D5040==(@D5041)
THEN{@D5576=1}
ELSE{@D5576=0}
Enter the formula property to set the page, modify the formula name, select the operation mode, if the cycle operation, you need to
specify the operation cycle ( Seconds ) Choice is a general or a targeted VQC applications, if they are not selected, then the formula
is not enabled. The following figure.

2 29

2.4.13 Channel table

Open channel list, on the right in the empty space starting from the first row in the table, right-click, enter a name.

2 30

For example: name VQC_2 , The name IDVQC_2 Only need to fill out, others by default, telecommunications layer parameter to fill in
the network card IP Address identified below.

2 31

Note: all workstation network cards to communicate with appliance must fill in.

2.4.14 System table

Right click on the system table and select system tables, edit, editing the system table pop-up dialog box, Blank start from the
first row in the list on the right, right-click to bring up the Properties dialog box, edit the system tables. As shown in the following
figure.
In related table editing system, points table, in the same period can be opened into the table, five points tables for editing. Note
You must right click on the Save to be effective.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 57/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 32

2.4.15 Voltage statistics

Voltage statistics for voltage qualification rate statistics. Right click voltages table table to bring up the Properties dialog
box, intervals on the left under the tree node displays the interval and remote measurement of voltage. From the left column, select the
desired statistics point to the right column. As shown in the following figure.

2 33

Determining the exit table, select the needed statistics added. System will add a point of complete statistics storage. Need to view
statistical data reports can be produced. About the report to view the report management section.

2.4.16 Historical data tables

Historical reports related to the telemetry, remote pulse points need to be added to the historical data in the configuration table,
point to historical data saved, to report the value of normal use, note that the same point there can only be one, if possible data
could not be saved. Historical data tables table right click to bring up the Properties dialog box, intervals on the left under the tree
node displays the interval distance measurement and pulse away. From the left column, select the desired statistics point to the right
column. As shown in the following figure

2 34

OK to exit and select the points will be added to the table. In the table you need to select the storage cycle ( double click the
pop-up drop down box to select ).

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 58/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 35

Setup is complete. System will add a point of complete statistics storage. Need to view statistical data reports can be produced.
About the report to view the report management section.

The sixth chapter Report maintenance

Directory

1.REVIEW
2.THEREPORTING SYSTEM FILES AND RESTORE THE MEANING
3.THEREPORTING SYSTEM WITH LOGIC
4.REPORTS SERIAL FILE TRANSFER CONFIGURATION

1. review
Report is a means of substation monitoring and storing data. This has two meanings: one is the SCADA system, run the report record
was its main function; the second is live, on-site daily work need to count a large number of tables, the report is a powerful support
operators work. Of the report is of great significance. Report has the following features :
1. Edit a report template: report templates are defined by a series of solid points, String, formula, and other collections. To edit
report template, such as create new report, edit report, copy reports, and so on, are basically done by engineers. Engineering
staff according to requirements, edit the corresponding report date table, table, timeline template.
2. run a report generated: live operators to select a date from template to generate the selected date range for the report table,
table, timeline, etc, site operators can also be output, such as printing, output into Excel format files and so on.
Click on Start Application module History and alarm Report , As shown in the following figure, report management interface
will pop up.

1 1 launch report

Reports after the commencement of proceedings, the layout shown in the following figure. In a tree structure on the left display
report list, displayed on the top menu bar and the toolbar. Some buttons in the toolbar, such as saving the report, real points updates
in the browser is not available when the report, shown in gray; report editing State, the status of automatic restore is available.
Report Studio list, the root node is the report Studio , under the master of the secondary nodes for all types of reports. If running a
report , and daily reports , and weekly reports , and monthly , and quarterly reports , and annual reports . Double-click the node, then
expand the secondary list. Secondary report lists all currently such reports in the list. Double-click any of the reports, when in
browse mode will be set according to the date, generate the corresponding tables, table, timeline; when in edit mode, opens the report

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 59/126
1/10/2017 <br>
template, you can edit.
If you need to create new or modify existing reports, need to select in the menu settings enter the report editor or on the toolbar,
click report edit button to enter the report editor. System based on the permissions that users and determine whether the user has
edited the report and the right to modify the report. Edit a report, please refer to the instructions for use.

1 2 Report main interface

2.the reporting system files and restore the meaning

Location of template files in the report: csc2100_home\project\Report\data Report template file and stored in the reporting system file.
Significance of each file are as follows:
ReportInfo.dat : Configuration for the report, storing information about user-defined reports, such as the report type, name and false
information in the report. Once the file is destroyed, the report definition will not be able to view the report. This file is
automatically generated by the program. Important and not lacking parts.
ReportInfo_back.dat : Configuration backup for the report files, automatic backups.
rptitem.def : The report read the historical library of configuration files, this file does not need to be modified as necessary.
sample.vts : Report the most basic template files, all user-defined reports are resulting. This file does not need to be modified.
Important and not lacking parts.
The rest of the .vts File is a user-defined at the end of the day, month, year report template file with the same name. These files
when the program is updated, perhaps because of the above ReportInfo.dat destruction, common report format change that stores information,
but cannot be read from the report. Meanwhile, in a new project, if a backup of the previous project, and want to import parts of some
templates. These have related to the resume of the report template, import.
These first .vts End of file ReportTest Directory, not including sample.vts File. And then open the report reestablished a wide range of
reports with the same name in the report, and then exit the report and move files back to the ReportTest Directory. And then open the
report, reopen the statements in the editing State, and then save it one by one. Therefore, the user-defined report templates, you can
make a backup to prevent loss.

3.the reporting system with logic

Minute type precision, including remote sensing measurements current value used in the configuration file rptitem.def recursive
collocation manner within a specified interval.
On hour type precision, including remote sensing measurement of hours maximum, extend the time for the former. Example: DT 2001-
01-12 14:03:00 record 2001-01-12 the day 13 points to 14 points this time statistics. Here in the sense you can do pay attention
when the report.
On day-type precision, including remote sensing measurement of daily maximum value, time and DT fields, DT 2001-01-12 23:59:55
record 2001-01-12 this day day time period statistical value.
On month-type precision, such as tele-measuring monthly maximum, then the time for DT fields extend, DT 2001-01-01 00:03:00
records 2004 year 3 month statistics.
On year type precision, such as telemetry annual maximum value etc, then time for DT field extension, DT 2001-01-01 00:03:00
record represents 2003 -year statistics.
Note:
Run history report is a report query in the data, and matched to the appropriate location. To enhance the maintainability of
the report, the report logic is stored in a data definition file. Defines the remote measurements, remote, remote pulse in the daily
report, monthly report and other various types of statistics in a report, the history of the corresponding table name, field names, data
types, formats, and so on. Report distance measurements in defined day reports the current value, remote pulse the absolute degree,
degrees per hour, you may need to modify the data point range definition file.
To define the bus A Phase voltage 12 Real-time values when, for example, telemetering data tables in a data definition file in the
current value of time accuracy0, Type minutes, approximately in the range of5Minutes to5Minutes. The report queries from the
historical library 12 time [5 minutes5 minutes ] within the scope of all bus A Phase voltage Real-time value and distance 12 Recent matches
in real time when the bus A Phase voltage 12 Real time value. Historical configuration, we know you can select storage period, such as 1
minute,5 minutes, if the real point of the stored point range period of more than reports, you may report not match the corresponding
values in real time. You must modify rptitem.def the corresponding statistical type of access point in range, modify the storage period for
the real point twice more, point storage period for 15 minutes, then take in the range of [16 minute ,16Minutes ]. Save rptitem.def file,
restart the report. In addition to the reports on other nodes to be effective, need to synchronize the report, report synchronization
see user instructions.
Also, the voltage qualified time value, in seconds, for, if the scene needs to change to other units such as hours. Also need to
modify the rptitem.def file. In the rptitem.def file, locate the field name for the type of statistics, such as A_IURUNTIMEinstead of
A_IURUNTIME/3600, repeat, day, week, month, quarter, year and other types of reports, uniform changes. Restart the report.
######################Report data definition file example#################################

#####Time accuracy 0 minute precision of 1 hour accuracy 2 3 4 5 days respectively Zhou Yuenian

BEGINDESC

##DayAnalog

TABLEDESC

## Comments Table name Field name Data format Time accuracy Time range ( Left) time frame (Right)

Current value TABSNAPSHOT A_RVAL 1 0 -5 5

Maximum value TABDAYMMA A_RMAX 1 2 -0 1

Maximum time TABDAYMMA TO_CHAR(A_DTMAX,'YYYY-MM-DD_HH24:MI:SS')

2 2-0 1

Minimum value TABDAYMMA A_RMIN 1 2 -0 1

Minimum time TABDAYMMA TO_CHAR(A_DTMIN,'YYYY-MM-DD_HH24:MI:SS')

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 60/126
1/10/2017 <br>
2 2-0 1

Average TABDAYMMA A_RAVE 1 2 -0 1

Accumulated value NULL NULL 1 2 -0 1

The maximum number TABDAYU A_IUHIGH 0 2 -0 1

The minimum number TABDAYU A_IULOW 0 2 -0 1

The maximum time NULL NULL 0 2 -0 1

The more time NULL NULL 0 2 -0 1

Cap rate TABDAYU A_RHIRATIO 1 2 -0 1

Minimum rate TABDAYU A_RLOWRATIO 1 2 -0 1

Qualifying time TABDAYU A_IURUNTIME 0 2 -0 1

TABLEEND

##WeekAnalog

TABLEDESC

## Comments Table name Field name Data format Time accuracy Time range ( Left) time frame (Right)

Current value NULL NULL 1 0 -5 5

Maximum value TABDAYMMA A_RMAX 1 2 -0 1

TABLEEND

##MonthAnalog

TABLEDESC

## Comments Table name Field name Data format Time accuracy Time range ( Left) time frame
(Right)

Current value TABSNAPSHOT A_RVAL 1 0 -5 5

Maximum value TABDAYMMA A_RMAX 1 2 -0 1

TABLEEND

##DayDigit

TABLEDESC

TABLEEND

##DayPulse

TABLEDESC

## Comments Table name Field name Data format Time accuracy Time range ( Left) time frame (Right)

Absolute power TABENERGYSNAPSHOT

P_RENERGY 1 0 -5 5

Electricity per hour TABHOURENERGY

P_RENERGY 1 0 -15 5

TABLEEND

TABLEEND

ENDDESC

4. reports serial file transfer configuration

Serial file transfer capabilities of the report relies on two completed programs in the background, as follows:
asyclient File sender, run CSC2000(v2) Host where the monitoring system, called by the reporting procedures.
asyserver : File receiver, running on a third party MIS System is located Windows Host. Running Live awaiting receive-side message
file, stored in the specified directory.
Taking into account serial transmission rate on the sending and receiving end, need to transmit a report file compression and
decompression. Compression and decompression by the third-party tools, file transfer program is called automatically, transparent to the
user.
Profile description
Sender and the receiver profiles asytransfer.ini , The sender profile path %csc2100_home%/config/ The receiver profiles asyserver Program in
the same directory, the path is not required. Specific parameters can participate in the file description. Project set up as follows:
#COMPORT=/dev/ttyb
For connected serial device name, Windows unix Different. For Solaris, join serial ports a, define #COMPORT=/dev/ttya, join serial port b,
define #COMPORT=/dev/ttyb For Windows, connect serial port 1, define #COMPORT=com1. Note here, do not open into the open connecting
serial port, five defines the serial port, such as conflict prevention.
#DIR=C:\xls
The path for the transmitter, whether to send the path where temporary files are located, the receiver, automatic storage path for
the file , The path must exist.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 61/126
1/10/2017 <br>
the file , The path must exist.
Environment variable settings
Serial transfer program, Solarisx Using the system comes with zip Tools that do not need to set. In Windows use WinRAR to Compress
decompress tool, so it needs WinRAR installation paths defined in the system environment variable Path for transmission tool called. For
example WinRAR installation path is C:\ProgramFiles\WinRAR, is in the Path environment variable, add the path to the " " Division. As
shown in the following figure.

4 1windows Xia winrar Environment variable settings

For the receiver, you will need to asyserver Put a shortcut to the start menu Start the following in order to boot automatically.

The seventh chapter Voltage and reactive power automatic control (VQC)

Directory

1VQCCONTROL PRINCIPLE
1.1CONTROL STRATEGY

1.2CONTROL MODE

1.3CONTROL OBJECTIVES

1.4LOCKING STRATEGY

1.5TAP ADJUSTMENT STRATEGY

1.6COMPENSATION ADJUSTMENT STRATEGY

2VQCPROJECT STEPS
2.1CONFIGURATION OF REAL-TIME DATABASE

2.2DRAW THE MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM

2.3CHECK THE DEVICE LIBRARY

2.4GENERATE TOPOLOGY CONNECTION

2.5INITIALIZEVQCVALUE

2.6VQCINTERVAL MATCHING

2.7SETVQCVALUE

2.8DRAWING ON NINE-ZONE DIAGRAM

2.9SOFT CLAMP

2.10VQCTEST

2.11TESTED WORKING

2.12UPGRADING TO1.2

2.13500KV25CONTROL CONSIDERATIONS

3SUMMARY OF COMMON ERRORS

4VQCOUTLINE
4.1TOPOLOGY TESTING

4.2VALUE TESTING

4.3PLATE SWITCHING TESTS

4.4STANDARD NINE-ZONE TEST

4.5OPTIMIZATION OF NINE DISTRICTS

4.6DOUBLE NINE

4.7FUNCTIONAL TESTING

4.8BLOCKING OF MAIN TRANSFORMER TEST

4.9CAPACITIVE LATCHING TESTING

5VQCENGINEERING VALUE LIST

5.1GLOBAL PARAMETERS

5.2PARAMETERS OF MAIN TRANSFORMER

5.3REACTIVE POWER DEVICE PARAMETERS

5.4VQCLIST OF LOCKED ITEMS

6VQCMESSAGE FORMAT
6.1LOCKING STATUS MESSAGES
6.2RESULT MESSAGE

6.3ACTION MESSAGE

6.4GLOBAL MESSAGES

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 62/126
1/10/2017 <br>
6.4GLOBAL MESSAGES

6.5REMOTE MESSAGE

6.6REMOTE MESSAGE

1VQC control principle

1.1 Control strategy
1.1.1 Optimization of nine districts

Characteristics of this strategy is when a qualified power factor, voltage limits can be predicted through capacitor can guarantee
qualified and you can adjust the voltage of power factor, power factor as qualified, will surge through the capacitor, or adjusting the
transformer tap. So you can achieve the goal of reducing the number of taps.
Among them, the 1 8 Area, 4 5 District boundaries in different operating conditions are not fixed, it is predicting the capacitor
switching if they can achieve the objective to determine.
The disadvantage of this strategy is difficult to accurately determine the degree of capacitor voltage adjustment, so when the
tuning capacitor voltage regulation, set to the maximum value you want, that is the lightest load switching when a group of capacitors
to change the voltage ratio.

1 1

1.1.2 Double 9 special control

General Terminal substation, VQC is based on low voltage bus voltage and high voltage power factor control for main control,VQC will
be according to the standard nine districts or optimized nine-zone 2 control scheme of control. For important hub substation, however,
you cannot simply take into account only the General adjustment control, and to perform to the high voltage system is normal. If the
high voltage side voltage is already severely limit, VQC in voltage should be taken into account to adjustment of voltage and reactive
power control on the high voltage side voltage (voltage) effects. For example: If the system has more caps, you cannot input capacitors
without worsening the system voltage; if system voltage is lower, you cannot further cut off capacitor system voltage collapse. At this
time the capacitor can be forced to adapt to the high-voltage side voltage limit State.
In this type of substations, taking into account the high voltage side voltage of border restrictions, combined with upper and lower
boundaries of the low voltage Busbar voltage, you can form following double 9 control: when the high voltage side voltage is normal,VQC
in a regular 9 districts (or other areas) control when the high voltage side voltage is not functioning correctly, follow these 9 zone
control logic.
1) High voltage side voltage limit
a. Low voltage maximum voltage are not considered reactive power optimization, forcing capacitors;
b. Low voltage side voltage is normal, if capacitors power factor does not limit, the capacitors;
c. The low voltage side voltage is lower than ( lower limit +Uq), raising connector;
2) High voltage side voltage lower limit

a) Low voltage side voltage is higher than the ( Cap-Uq), then cut tap;
b) Low voltage side voltage is normal, if capacitor power factor does not limit voted capacitors;
c) Low voltage voltage lower limit is not considered reactive power optimization, force capacitors;
Note: If the normal control range takes into account the Uq Impact of double 9 Area taking into account the Uq Effect, otherwise
the Uq Will not be considered.

1 2

Because of the double 9 Programme of action, in order to avoid and shock caused by the conventional way of controlling alternating
repeated actions, so in the high pressure side of the upper and lower boundary adds a return value, when the high voltage caps VQC In
accordance with the above 9 Action, and only when the high voltage side voltage returns to the limit value U Hou, VQC In accordance
with the normal 9 Similarly, high pressure side, the lower rear, returned only when high voltage voltage larger than the lower limit
value U Hou, VQC In accordance with the normal 9 District action. U value: tap of voltage regulation and adjustment rate, whichever is
greater value of capacitor voltage.
If you do not select the high voltage side voltage is used as boundary conditions, VQC will only consider conventional multi zone
control.

1.1.3 500kV transformer substation 25 zone control

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 63/126
1/10/2017 <br>
1.1.3 500kV transformer substation 25 zone control

VQC3.04 And later, V2 Monitoring 1.2.1.9 And later versions support this feature

1.1.3.1 Meet 500kV requires AVC scheme

Table 1 1

500kV Below the Below the Higher than Higher

the than the
Qualified The lower In the
limit limit target scope Upper Qualified
220kV targets limit


Higher Capacitors Capacitors
than the Capacitors
Cut tap Cut tap Cast Cast
Qualified reactance reactance Vote for
limit 15 13 reactor9
Cut tap11 10
Higher Capacitors Capacitors Capacitors
than the
Cut tap Cut tap Vote for Cast reactance Cast
Upper reactor12 reactance
targets 16 14 8
(At its peak, 7
theU500<
U5m,Without
shunt reactor
26)
Reactance Reactance Capacitors Capacitors
In the Cast Vote for Do not adjust Cast reactance Cast
target capacitor capacitance reactance
scope 18 25 6
Cut tap17 Raising
connector
5
Below the Reactance Reactance Reactance
The lower Vote for Vote for Vote for Raising Raising
limit capacitance capacitance capacitance24 connector connector
19 20
4 3
(Bottom,
U500>
U5m,Without
capacitor27)
Below the Reactance Reactance Reactance
Qualified Cast Vote for Cast capacitor Raising Raising
limit capacitor capacitance connector connector
22 Raising
21 connector23 2 1

Table description:
U5m U2m Respectively 500KV 220kV The voltage mean of the upper and lower limit value.

Raising connector added 220KV Number of coils to improve 220KV The voltage.

Cut joints reduce 220KV Number of coils, reducing 220KV The voltage.

Judging by the current period in the time table of peak downs (hills, valleys, flat) properties
Area allows for multiple adjustment mode, sequence represents the order of precedence.

1.1.3.2 Meet 220kV requires AVC scheme

Table 1 2

220kV
Lower Below the In the target Higher than Higher
qualified lower limit scope the than the
limit
500kV Upper Qualified
targets limit
Capacitors Capacitors Capacitors
Higher than
the Raising Raising Cast reactance Vote for Vote for
connector connector reactor10 reactor9
Qualified Raising
limit 15 13 connector11

Capacitors Capacitors Capacitors

Raising Raising Vote for Cast Vote for
connector connector reactor12 reactance reactor7
Higher than
the 16 14 (At its peak, 8
theU220<
Upper targets
U2m,Without
shunt reactor
26)
Reactance Reactance Capacitors Capacitors

Cast capacitor Vote for Do not adjust Vote for Cast
In the target capacitance reactor6 reactance
scope Raising 18 25
connector17 Cut tap

5
Reactance Reactance Reactance
Cast capacitor Cast Vote for Cut tap Cut tap
capacitor capacitance24
Below the 19 4 3
20 (Bottom,U220>
The lower
limit U2m,Without
capacitor27)

Reactance Reactance Reactance
Below the
Cast capacitor Cast Cast capacitor Cut tap Cut tap
Qualified capacitor
limit 21 Cut tap23 2 1
22

Table description:
U5m U2m Respectively 500kV 220kV The voltage mean of the upper and lower limit value.

Raising connector added 220kV Number of coils to improve 220kV The voltage.
Cut joints reduce 220kV Number of coils, reducing 220kV The voltage.

Judging by the current period in the time table of peak downs (hills, valleys, flat) properties

1.1.3.3 Meet 500kV requires AVQC programme

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 64/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Table 1 3
500kV Below the Below
the
Qualified In the target Above target Higher than
limit The scope ceiling the qualified
220kV lower limit ceiling


Capacitors Capacitors
Higher than Cut tap Cut tap Capacitors Vote for reactor Vote for reactor
the 10 9
15 13 Cast reactance
Qualified (DangQ220kV<Qx
limit Cut tap11
Raising
connector34)
Capacitors Capacitors Capacitors
Cut tap Cut tap Vote for reactor Vote for reactor Vote for reactor
12 8 7
16 14
Higher than (At its peak, the (DangQ220kV<Qx
the U500<
Raising
Upper U5m,Without connector35)
targets shunt reactor26)
(DangQ220kV>Qs
Cut tap28)
Reactance Reactance Capacitors Capacitors
Cast capacitor Vote for Vote for reactor Cast reactance
capacitance 6
In the Cut tap17 18 Raising
target Do not adjust25 (DangQ220kV<Qx connector5
scope (Dang Raising
Q220kV>Qs
connector31)
Cut tap30)
Reactance Reactance Reactance
Vote for Vote for Vote for Raising Raising
capacitance19 capacitance capacitance24 connector connector
20
(Dang (The trough, 4 3
Below the Q220kV>Qs U500>
The lower Cut tap32) U5m,Without
limit capacitor27)
(DangQ220kV<Qx
Raising connector
29)
Reactance Reactance
Vote for Vote for Reactance Raising Raising
Below the capacitance21 capacitance connector connector
22 Cast capacitor
Qualified (Dang 2 1
limit Raising connector
Q220kV>Qs 23
Cut tap33)

Table description:

U5m U2m Respectively 500kV 220kV The voltage mean of the upper and lower limit value.

Q220kV 220kV Side reactive power flow. Take out is positive, is a main transmitter to 220kV flows are positive.

Qs : Q220kV Reactive power limit Qx : Q220kV Reactive power limit.

Raising connector added 220kV Number of coils to improve 220kV The voltage.

Cut joints reduce 220kV Number of coils, reducing 220kV The voltage.

Judging by the current period in the time table of peak downs (hills, valleys, flat) properties

1.1.3.4 Meet 220kV requires AVQC programme

Table 1 4

220kV
Higher than
Lower Below the In the Above target the qualified
qualified lower limit target scope ceiling ceiling
500kV limit

Capacitors

Higher Raising Raising Capacitors Vote for

connector connector Capacitors reactor9
than the Cast reactance
Qualified 15 13 Vote for Dang
Raising reactor10 Q220kV>Qs
limit connector11
Cut tap34
Capacitors
Raising Raising Vote for reactor
connector connector 12 Capacitors

16 14 (At its peak, Vote for

Higher theU220< Capacitors reactor7
than the
U2m,Without Vote for Dang
Upper shunt reactor26 reactor8 Q220kV>Qs
targets ) Cut tap35
DangQ220kV<Qx
Raising
connector28
Reactance Reactance
Capacitors
Cast Vote for Vote for Capacitors
capacitor capacitance18
In the target reactor6 Cast
scope Raising (Dang Do not adjust reactance
connector17 Q220kV<Qx (Dang
25 Q220kV>Qs Cut tap5
Raising Cut tap31)
connector30)
Reactance Reactance Reactance
Vote for Vote for Vote for
capacitance capacitance20 capacitance24
Below the 19
(Bottom,U220>
The lower Dang Cut tap Cut tap
Q220kV<Qx U2m,Without
limit 4 3
capacitor27)
Raising
connector32 DangQ220kV>Qs
Cut tap29
Reactance Reactance
Vote for Vote for
Below the capacitance capacitance22 Reactance
21
Qualified Cast capacitor Cut tap Cut tap
limit Dang
Q220kV<Qx Cut tap23 2 1
Raising
connector33

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 65/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Table description:

U5m U2m Respectively 500kV 220kV The voltage mean of the upper and lower limit value.

Q220kV 220kV Side reactive power flow. Take out is positive, is a main transmitter to 220kV flows are positive.

Qs : Q220kV Reactive power limit Qx : Q220kV Reactive power limit.

Raising connector added 220kV Number of coils to improve 220kV The voltage.

Cut joints reduce 220kV Number of coils, reducing 220kV The voltage.
Judging by the current period in the time table of peak downs (hills, valleys, flat) properties

1.2 Control mode

Automatic: taps the adjustment of main transformer and capacitor ( Reactor ) Group switching is automatic;

Semi-automatic: capacitor ( Reactor ) The switch for automatic control of the group, participation of main transformer tap adjustments
but does not export, only remote hint, with manual adjustment;
Fixed: main transformer taps, and a capacitor ( reactor ) groups are involved in the voltage regulator, but does not automatically
export, only remote hint, with manual adjustment.

1.3 Control objectives

Voltage and reactive power optimization: using voltage limit value and limit value of reactive power optimization control of main
transformer on-load tap-changer control and capacitor (reactor) group switching. Regulation does not make the voltage or reactive power
requirement, not to regulate.
Ensure the voltage: the voltage reactive power does not meet the requirements at the same time, ensure voltage is normal.
Give priority to ensuring the reactive: when voltage and reactive power can not meet the requirements at the same time, giving
priority to ensure normal reactive.

1.4 Locking strategy

All locking items can be set, choose whether to enable or modify the locked condition, even increasing locking items. Locking
objects to select set of VQC device or a single control device (transformer, or capacitive). Flexibility to adapt to the requirements of
the various complex.

1.5 Tap adjustment strategy

1.5.1 Parallel voltage

When the parallel regulation of main transformer tap, adjust the linkage of main transformer, VQC As the melody of the main
transformer in the limit state of main transformer, another automatically as from the transfer of main transformer ( Melody from the tone
of the relationship not fixed ) , Melody primary tap after a successful action, and control from main transformer if melody primary
action is not successful, VQC Will automatically lock the adjustment of main transformer in parallel if from the regulating action of
main transformer is not successful, VQC Melody primary will automatically be changed back, then locking pressure adjustment. Linkage in
the adjustment process, as long as there is a single main transformer tap sliding gear, VQC will immediately stop adjustment and locking
of parallel adjustment of the main transformer. Above locking must be manually reverted.
Automatic correction: the juxtaposition of two stalls of main transformer differential, but in parallel within the allowable range
of stalls, while voltage limits. Program to automatically correct file. Correction principles: only in the Act of main transformer tap
only when action is needed for automatic correction.

1.6 Compensation adjustment strategy

Compensation action strategy has four cycle switch, the specified order switching, switching and pressing capacity compensation
equipment of switching, these four strategies are a priority, switched in pairs > Switching in the order specified > Compensation device
of switching capacity > According to the time switch. This means that, if you switched the same priority, according to the compensation
capacity, if the same capacity, then determine the most appropriate action depending on the time of compensation.
Compensation devices on the same bus bar: in accordance with the fixed value capacitor specified policy actions.
Compensation on a different bus devices: more limited degree of priority action voltage compensation device on the bus. If the bus
voltage, in accordance with a programme of compensation device on the bus.
Basic principle: capacitive reactance are not on the same bus or parallel bus allow simultaneous inputs

1.6.1 According to the time switch

From your last interval time compensation device, motion the higher the priority.

1.6.2 Switching in the order specified

Reactive equipment the switch priority setting, the larger, higher priority.

1.6.3 Series resistance of the capacitor size switching (switching)

Series to ranging hundred points reactor value of reactor device Shi, program can according to size reactor device match of need, by
given of order for voted cut, and this based Shang implemented cycle voted cut; Dang any a group or several group capacitor exit run
Shi, program still can according to size reactor device match of need, automatically determine new of voted cut order, well this based
Shang implemented cycle voted cut.
Capacitor operation of each unit within the order: inputs: - Small - large - small; when: small - large - small - large . In any
operation mode, the unit 10KV When there was no chain of reactance of capacitors on the bus, without chain of low reactance of
capacitors in this unit. Other capacitors in the unit sequence of operation can be set.
Run a string when the reactance of the capacitor fault trip, in any operation mode, the bus when there was no series reactance of
capacitors, automatic removal of the bus low reactance of capacitors.

1.6.4 Compensation device of switching capacity

Priority depends on the distance after switching the actual reactive compensation equipment best reactive distance, near the higher
the priority. For no work more ceiling, bus Shang has small capacity capacitor, and select of pre voted capacitor input Hou may caused
no work more limited, so, used first voted big capacitor, again according to reality cut off small capacitor of strategy, input big
capacitor Qian, must check bus Shang whether has can cut of small capacitor, has small capacitor, is input; no small capacitor, is not
action.

1.6.5 Strong cast strong

1.6.5.1 How to enable strong investment and strong features.

Fixed value < Control priority > " Voltage indicator priorities ".
Fixed value < Strong switching voltage limit > Should be greater than the value of 0 And less than 1

1.6.5.2 Strong investment and strong working principle

In the case of normal pressure, if the controlled voltage limit situation is serious, but you cannot adjust the tap to achieve the
purpose of the surge, you may want to consider with a strong investment and strong ways to guarantee the quality of voltage of the
capacitors qualified, this is normal can not meet the voltage requirements under regulation a complementary control measure. For example
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 66/126
1/10/2017 <br>
capacitors qualified, this is normal can not meet the voltage requirements under regulation a complementary control measure. For example
Dang any a main variable regulation times reached limit times, or any a main variable occurred points joint regulation locking,
situation, main variable cannot through on points joint of adjustment to achieved voltage adjustment, is at can take of adjustable
pressure measures is: not consider power factor ( or no work ) whether qualified, through on no work power of voted cut to achieved voltage
of adjustment. This measure is known as a strong investment and strong. Once the voltage limit is in the strong cast strong cutting
area, and other logical conditions are met, capacitors will be exported immediately. This way effective remedy under the General
Regulation for voltage transformer taps not timely action and serious hit a flaw or voltage limit time is greatly reduced. Also, by
increasing the number of reactive power compensation equipment in action and reduce the number of joint actions, so as to reduce the
maintenance workload of taps and prolong the service life of the main transformer tap.
Strong cast strong regional and functional standard, optimization of nine nine district, bi-district 3 Conventional control
strategies are applicable. Is not drawn on the control logic diagram. In this case, < strong switching voltage limits > must be set to
greater than 0 , or strong cast strong zone extends to the upper and lower boundaries of the voltage, tap would not have a chance.

2VQC project steps

The so-called VQC , Is the automatic control of voltage and reactive power, when the target voltage and reactive power limit of
cases by adjusting the taps or to qierong resistance to target ways to optimize substation bus voltage and transformer high-voltage side
reactive power of purpose. Which refers to the need to monitor the voltage of Busbar voltage reactive power refers to the main
transformer high-voltage side reactive. Which also need to run parallel or independent of the main transformer, main transformer into
complex operation such as which bus to take different action strategies.
VQC Is based on a single primary variable as the control unit, when side by side of main transformer occurs, side by side as a
control unit for main transformer in the regulation. In order to accomplish a complete control processVQC must know the following 4
types of information.
1 VQC Need to know the station equipment: includes several main transformer, capacitance, bus. Because the system uses your
library design ideas, main wiring diagram of primitives are and equipment corresponds to the device one by one in a library and,
therefore, main wiring picture after the device the number of VQC can know.

2 VQC Need to know the connection between devices: and bus bar connection of main transformer, bus and what capacitance is
connected. Main wiring picture finished, generate topology connection afterVQC associated information can also know the device, and can
run in real-time based on the divided state to determine the connection between the status of the device.
3 VQC Need to know real-time information and equipment associated with the property: such as the stall of the main transformer,
main transformer high-voltage side reactive power, l / Drop / Stop remote control, bus voltage points. The formation of these information
is accomplished by setting the device property.
4 VQC Need to know the parameters and limits settings: control objective side is the side or the high pressure side, how much is
the minimum and maximum levels of voltage and reactive power. These parameters is through the <VQC settings > settings.

VQC Since there is so much information, so after internal logic, and certainly have a lot of VQC The output of information. VQC
most directly on the output taps and direct control of capacitive reactance. In order to enable users to understand the current VQC
detailed control of StateVQC device sends all status messages, as long as the VQC points in the template was added to the library in
real time, these remote telemetry can be refreshed in real time by messages, reflecting the VQCThe current state. Usually requires
configuration on nine-zone diagram next to these points, in a more visible way for users to see.
Nine-zone diagram is part of the graphics system, was VQC Direct display of the control operation of the main transformer. VQC is
an independent program, then that information is sent between the two entirely separate programs, which with the help of VQC in value is
initialized in VQC virtual point of the interval, which point ID32 Are saved inside the set value, normally hidden in the value
interface. VQC refreshed in real time when running these virtual point values. Graphics by reading the value to obtain the IDand
corresponding values are displayed on the graph.
Below is the details of project implementation steps.

2.1 Configuration of real-time database

Because VQC Senior application must be established in the basic SCADA On the basis of complete. So, the first step, added in the
library configuration in real time, interval, point to generate the basic SCADA remote data.

VQC High pressure side of the system required P\Q FDI inflows into a positive direction if the project site PQ Direction setting, in
contrast, you need to set the virtual measuring point through formula refreshes the measurement values , For example: set P ID32 1 New
virtual point ID32 2 , You need new formula IF(1)THEN{@A2=(1)*@A1} Formula property trigger for the cycle, general application settings
after the graphic corresponding data attributes correspond to changes in main transformer equipment ID32 Setup information.

2.2 Draw the main wiring diagram

A , Switch switch the configuration of remote property must be < Circuit breaker / Knife switch > Types, otherwise it will create
graphical topologic coloring cannot be made in time.
B , Main transformer active and reactive power and voltage changes in remote dead set 0

C Main transformer, set the graphic properties; refer to the value the project list

D Capacitor, set the graphic properties: make sure to set the rated capacity Mvar

E Bus, set the graphic properties: the voltage set point lower right corner should be consistent with the display point above. Note
the bus voltage lower limit and upper limit set (available on the monitor screen, select bus right- < remote settings > settings), if the
user does not have required, generally set the rated voltage of 80% and 120%, Corresponds to this setting have a latching voltage
exceeding the scope of the project closed, that is, if the bus voltage is greater than the rated voltage of 120% or less than the rated
voltage of 80%, locking control. If you do not set this lock is not enabled properly.

2.3 Check the device library

A , Ensure that the primary variable, Rong Kangqi device library in the order corresponding to the actual, 1# Main transformer should
be at first, 2# Main transformer in the second , Analogize; capacitors / Reactance is similar. If the 2# operation of the main transformer,1#
into a long term programme, 1# main transformer equipment library must exist, otherwise the message will be misplaced. Correspondence and
messages about device order, 2.7 in section has a more detailed description.

B Equipment all double, and three times in the library, capacitors, reactors, bus properties related to electric devices must be
configured, you will need to delete useless redundancy. Start Start > application > database management > Management Select device list >
>XX substation > common equipment within the station. In right list in the mouse left key click above of < equipment type > column name,
from form in the found equipment type for double circle variable, and three circle variable, and capacitor, and reactor device, and bus
of records, if found useless of equipment (forward planning of except), selected, click right key menu delete, ensure this five class
equipment of number and expected of equipment number consistent.

2.4 Generate topology connection

In the main wiring diagram is edited, graphics related device properties are configured in the graphics right on the Edit screen
button to select " Form a topological connections ".

It is to be noted that, when the master device connection on the connection diagram is modified, equipment is moved, the device has
increased, after save in the graphic, you need right in the graphic on the Edit screen button to select " Form a topological connections
". So that you can rebuild the correct device connection provided to VQC to right side of main transformer or not and which buses into
operation automatically. But if the VQC program is already running, you will not automatically read this information, you need to
manually put the VQC program restarts.

2.5 Initialize VQC Value

Restart the console, run " VQCexe e[kv] "If the VQCexe Parameters are not familiar with, you can run VQCexe h View help. For
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 67/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Restart the console, run " VQCexe e[kv] "If the VQCexe Parameters are not familiar with, you can run VQCexe h View help. For
example: transformer high voltage side voltage grade 110kV, enter VQCexe110e return to complete initialization.

After this command is completed, you can see in the configuration tool VQC Interval is automatically generated, some within the same
time interval Description VQC State information Deficiency, deficiency of these point values VQC Automatically updated in the process,
describe its running state, and much information on nine-zone diagram is obtained from these false points.
Note: VQC Interval must be generated in this way automatically, manually created is invalid. Each time you do this, arising from the
last value is initialized the imaginary point will be automatically deleted and are replaced with new virtual points, so, if you have
already configured at the nine-zone diagram, and false information is part of the dynamic marking configuration information is lost. So
after this operation is completed, you should save a business data backup library.
VQC Interval automatically creates a virtual point meaning description, see table 21 :
Table 2 1

Remote Point name Meaning

type
Virtual Start time of main Action start time,
remote transformerID expressed their readiness
to start after this time,
longer than the hide time
and interval time after
time limits to control
exports.
Virtual After the action of Indicates the last time of
remote main transformerID the main transformer has
more long time.
Virtual Action of main Nine-zone diagram to move
remote transformer equipment device information
Virtual To act of main Nine-zone diagram direction
remote transformer information
Virtual Reactive power of main Reactive values on nine-
remote transformerID zone diagram
Virtual Transformer power Real-time power factor
remote factorID values on nine-zone diagram
Virtual Current of main Low voltage of nine-zone
remote transformer voltage diagram
lower limit
Virtual Main transformer Voltage limit for nine-zone
remote current voltage limit diagram
Virtual Main transformer Lower limit reference
remote current reference voltage on nine-zone
voltage lower limit diagram
Virtual Main transformer Reference voltage limit for
remote current reference nine-zone diagram
voltage limit
Virtual Transformer power On nine-zone diagram for
remote factor current limit lower power factor
Virtual Transformer power Power factor limit of nine-
remote factor current limit zone diagram
Virtual Current of main Low reactive of nine-zone
remote transformer reactive diagram
power limit
Virtual Current of main Reactive ceiling on nine-
remote transformer reactive zone diagram
power limit
Virtual Capacitor delay timeID From the capacitor's last
remote time there have been many
long time.
Virtual Unlocking of main Revert button for the main
remote transformerID transformer, the point0
When returning function.
Virtual Allows the input of Features cushion of soft
remote main transformer soft switching transformer
Strip
Virtual Capacitor unlockID Push to reset for the
remote capacitor, the point0When
returning function.
Virtual Permissible capacitor Cushion of soft switching
remote input soft Strip the capacitors function

2.6VQC interval matching

By configuration tools in real time, automatically generated in the preceding step VQC Add interval VQC The template data, based on
the actual number and number of main transformer capacitance, VQC Template selection of relevant telemetering, remote letter, remote
control point.
For example: If the station has 2 Main transformer, 10 A capacitor, then from the VQC Singled out in the template 1# Main transformer,
2# Main transformer, 1# Capacitor ~10# All capacitors telemetering, remote letter, remote control points into intervals; if you stood in
the main number or capacitive reactance is greater than the number of templates in the equipment capacity, you need to VQC Message
format manually increase the content in the template, such as templates, only 5 Primary information, but now there are 6 A main
transformer, you'll need to add to the template 6 Telemetering, remote letter, remote control of a main transformer.

It is to be noted that, in a template 1# Main transformer, which is the primary variable in the device library is located on the
first, 2# Corresponds to the main transformer is within the second main transformer in the device library, where the first and the second
is in accordance with main transformer GlobalID To sort from smallest to largest. Capacity anti-device similar, due to capacitor and
reactor device with belongs to compensation equipment, so capacitor and reactor device as a equipment for sort, template in the of 1#
capacitor, corresponds to of is in equipment library in the is located in first a of capacitor or reactor device, template in the of 2#
capacitor, corresponds to of is in equipment library in the is located in second a of capacitor or reactor device. Therefore in order to
make these points more clearly the meaning of, and, according to the actual device name to modify the name, for example, if the device
is the first capacitive device called "1 reactor ", then all is contained in the template "1#Capacitor " name changed to " 1 reactor ".

VQC All remote telemetry in the template, it is VQC Analog devices send out messages, resolution refresh these values from the
background, can describe the current VQC Running status information, such as device lock, are the equipment needed, the current main
transformer in the run area, and so on. These remote telemetry, in General, are not as VQC writes the locked condition of VQC of any
lock in the lock list.
Remote control in a template, you can set the corresponding on/off remote control point in the background to complete the VQC Or a
single main transformer / The remote switching of capacitive.

2.7 Set VQC Value

From the user's hand VQC Fixed value list, in accordance with 5 <VQC Engineering fixed value list > Instructions, via VQC Set
interface to set its parameters. VQC setting detailed instructions for use of the interface, refer to theCSC2000(V2) in the seventh
chapter of the manual.
Lock table locking condition field in written format: formulas and conditional formatting in a consistent, if ID32=2 Remote signaling
1 Lock when you are directly in the < Blocking conditions > Field writes " @D2 " You can, if 0 When locking, you will need to take, write
directly to " !@D2 "

If the user is not subject to special requirements, in the lock table < Device name > " All compensation device " " All of main
transformer " Lock project VQC " Soft clamp lock " Don't need adjusting locking conditions, embedded in these closed projects closed
conditions VQC Within the program, you can modify the lock list " Atresia enabled " To determine whether this lock project enabled. If
these closed projects closed conditions is setting, with built-in locking conditions for relationships or, any establishment would be
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 68/126
1/10/2017 <br>
these closed projects closed conditions is setting, with built-in locking conditions for relationships or, any establishment would be
the lock.

2.8 Drawing on nine-zone diagram

In the release package csc2100_home\project\ Graphics resources \ There are samples for your reference.

Drawing on nine-zone diagram. Nine districts have several transformers need to draw a few diagrams, on nine-zone diagram places the
lower right corner of a remote point, corresponding to n# main transformer's start time.

Configuration information that the user needs to display next to the nine-zone diagram, General, VQC Total investment, total return;

Main display: start time, delay time, number of days, the total number, locking information, unlock the button, switching the remote
control button figure 21 As shown in.

Capacitance corresponds to display: action time, number of days, the total number, locking information, unlock the button, switching
the remote control button. Figure 22 shows.

Upper and lower limits on nine-zone diagram shows problems, when minimum on nine-zone diagram is not displayed, please check for the
following conditions
1 VQC Program does not start, if it does not start, start VQC The program.

2 If performed VQCexe ekV Initialize command does not restart after setting desk Please restart.

3 , Whether the nine-zone diagram corresponds to the main transformer for the loss of color, if it is, then nothing displayed on the
upper and lower limits of normal, colored in to view.
4 Not set upper and lower limits, time constant, or upper and lower limits are not logical, a situation of lower value is greater
than the upper.
5 , Check VQC In a global setting < Current control > < Select a control variable > If < Select a control variable > As specified in Cos ,
But does not contain the values of the period set in the project Cos " Power factor " Or item does not contain " Control on the target
voltage lower limit " , Then the upper and lower limits on nine-zone diagram is certainly an exception, because there is no lower bound
on the value of the related settings. All in all, control objectives that appear in the global parameter, be sure to set upper and lower
limit values are set, otherwise will result in nine-zone diagram " well " does not show up.

More distribution points see table 22

2 1

2 2

Table 2 2

Information on nine- Function Real-time database

zone diagram
VQCTotal switching Remote control VQCInterval/Remote
pressure plate (soft) buttons control point
VQCInterval/Real
remote
VQCTotal return Push to reset.
Reversion

protection, specify
VQCaddress
#Main transformer Remote control VQCInterval/Remote
switching plate control
buttons (soft)
VQCInterval/Virtual
remote
#Capacitor switching Remote control VQCInterval/Remote
plate buttons (soft) control
VQCInterval/Virtual
remote
Main transformer/ Remote reset0 VQCInterval/Virtual
Capacitor return remote signal: unlock
button ID
VQCHard Board Remote display Into the virtual space/
switching Virtual remote
No hard Strip if you do
not have to display

#Switching hard strip Remote display Into the virtual space/

show Virtual remote
#Capacitor switching Remote display Into the virtual space/
hard strip show Virtual remote
Start of main Remote display VQCInterval/Virtual
transformer remote
Main transformer/ Remote display VQCInterval/Virtual
Capacitor delay time remote
Main transformer/ Remote display VQCInterval/Virtual
Capacitance day remote
action times
Main transformer/ Remote display VQCInterval/Virtual
Capacitor the total remote
action times
The total blocking of Display the lock VQCInterval/Real
main transformer status of main remote
information transformer

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 69/126
1/10/2017 <br>
-Locking information Hard Strip/In-place VQCInterval/Real
on main transformer locking remote
Load lock
Voltage scope
locking
Voltage change over
a small lock
Bus-bar differential
pressure locking
Main transformer
protection lock
Rejection number
lock
Number blocking
Total number of
times the alarm
Communications
blocking
Slide lock
Gear differential
lock
Stall limit lock
Body or light gas
action locking
Capacitor total Displays capacitance VQCInterval/Real
atresia information locking status remote
-Locking information Soft clamp lock VQCInterval/Real
on capacitance remote
Hard Strip/In-place
locking
Protection lock
Rejection number
lock
Number blocking
Maintenance times to
alert
Communications
blocking
Bus-bar differential
pressure locking

Main reasons
blocking

2.9 Soft clamp

VQC Supports both VQC Device, transformer, the cushion of soft switching of capacitive reactance and hard plate switching, hard
Strip is configured to select whether to enable, soft plates can also be set to determine whether or not enabled. Soft plate is enabled
by default. Cushion of soft and hard plates at the same time work, their relationship to in-line , and input is input, otherwise the
function exits.
Enable hard Strip features: 1 , To see if the system introduced into the signal, all opened in point information is configured in <
Into the virtual space > In the. 2, if there are related into the signal, see VQC set lock in the interface list, each device hardened
plate locking projects added into the imaginary point as blocking condition.
Disable hard Strip switching function: each device hardened plate locking project into the false information or sets whether this
lock is enabled the project to the Government.
Cushion of soft switching function is enabled: soft plate locking items found in the lock list, this item < Atresia enabled > Is set
to Yes.
Deactivate a cushion of soft switching functions: soft plate locking items found in the lock list, this item < Atresia enabled > Set
to no.
Under normal circumstances, soft Strip not recommended for disabled, because once a cushion of soft switching function deactivated
VQC Will not be able to accept the switching distance VQC Command, and switching commands for a single device.

2.10VQC Test
Startup procedures VQC Testing. Restart the console, run the TopoAppnew start the console, run the VQCexenew start the console, run
the CscCommu1.

Test, please refer to 4 <VQC Test outline >

After the test is completed, these programs can be configured to start automatically.

2.11 Tested working

1 , Testing has been completed, requests the automatic Launcher configuration in accordance with the following requirements.

2 , You need to configure the background application include: VQC , Topology, history and communications.

3 , Number of manual tests all canceled.

4 And the VQC Equipment recovery time interval value.

5 , Real-time database saved into the commercial library.

6 , Engineering backup.

2.12 Upgrade to 1.2

VQC The upgrade operation is carried out on the basis of monitoring has been upgraded in the background.

If the old system VQC Work has yet to start, VQC Interval has not been established, then you need to 1.2 VQC Template to import, and
then VQC Construction production.

Otherwise, if the VQC Project has been completed, you will need to follow the following steps to upgrade:

1. new start cmd command line window, type VQCexeh, after the carriage return, VQCexe supported parameters help description.
VQCexeu[kV] existing VQC upgrade set values, generally in VQC versions after the upgrade, you need to perform this command. For
example, if the high voltage side voltage substation for 220kV,VQC from 1.1 upgrade to 1.2 version after the update is complete, execute
the command: VQCexeu220

2. due to changes in locking remote location in the message, according to VQC message format (shaded in red), of VQC in intervals to
modify the remote name associated, both on nine-zone diagram displayed in text messages.
3. in the original system if you have achieved VQC closed formulas, you need VQC value interface, write locking locking condition
related items in a list, the original formula can be directly removed from the configuration in real time.
For example: If a closed project blocking condition is ID 1 2 Two remote volume simultaneously 1 , You write @D1&&@D2 If the
blocking condition is ID 1 1 ID 2 0 , You can write @D1||!@D2

Substation capacity expansion

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 70/126
1/10/2017 <br>
VQC1.25 ( Included ) Later have this feature, but is in need of attention, the current 1.32 Previous versions implemented VQCexe u
[kV] Hou, locking items section will be re-initialized, meaning that if the list before locking the locking conditions have been set,
these settings will be lost, please do a backup on this table, but the other settings are the same.

If the number of main transformer, capacitance changes, such as substation capacity needs to increase and capacitance of the main
transformer, then you need to perform the following steps.
1 In the main wiring diagram drawn by increasing device, right in the graphic on the Edit screen button to select " Form a
topological connections ".
2 Command line execution VQCexe u[kV] Such as 220kV substation extension, performing "VQCexeu220". The purpose of this
command is to generate new transformer or capacitive reactance of fixed value.
3 Nine distinguished figure and main transformer or capacitor diagram adds a new capacitive device information, in accordance with
the 2.8 Referred to in sections and configuration information.

4 Open VQC Set the interface, added relevant settings on the device, if the new transformer, you need to < Transformer parameters >
< Blocking information > The added value of main transformer in the set. If additional capacitance, you need < capacitive reactance
parameters > and < atresia information > What's new in capacitance value to set.

5 Run VQCexe , Check for information display, blocking signals and other information are correct.

2.13500kV25 Control considerations

If the substation is 25 Control strategy, you need to pay attention to the following points:

1 Value set: set global parameters in the < Control side > < Refer to the side > < Control strategy > Which control is a
priority. For example, if the substation " gives priority to 500kV requires AVC scheme ", you need to set < control strategy > Is
specified as "25 AVC_500"control designated as " high side ", reference to " "If the substation " gives priority to 500kV
requires AVQC programme ", you need to set < Control strategy > Designated as a " 25 AVQC_500 "Control designated as " high side ",
reference to " side ".
2 / Load setting: the need for specified periods or peak load segment / Valley / Property needs depending on the policy choices you
need to configure the project. If, for example, is AVQC_25 , the allocation of reactive power, control the target voltage, refer
to the target voltage and control voltage and reference voltage qualified qualified. And if it is AVC_25 , then no allocation of
reactive power, control side only need to configure the target voltage, refer to the target voltage and control voltage and
reference voltage qualified qualified.
3 Area graph is displayed, the abscissa is the preferred control side, ordinate reference control side. For ease of testing, the
area next to the configuration, you can change dynamic tag display the current zone (VQC intervals can be found in the remote).
4 Upgrade: 1.2x Upgrade to 3.04 Version: can use common ways to upgrade: see chapter < System installation >5.1 Section database table
structure changed in case of upgrade.

3 Summary of common errors

Errors 1 : Switch switch on the main wiring diagram General configuration the remote property so far. Consequence: this can lead to
graph topology analysis does not correctly when breaker and VQC judgment cannot be correct. Be configured to circuit breaker / switch.

Errors 2 : The capacitor corresponds to the switch configuration error. Consequences:VQC control orders will charged the wrong
switch, and fatal errors.
Errors 3 : Equipment and similar equipment order does not correspond to the actual. Consequences: real-time library of VQC main
transformer, capacitor remote remote real dislocation.
Errors 4 : Device properties are not configured in the library's main transformer / Capacitance. Consequences may result in VQC
abnormal exit on startup.
Errors 5 : Ignored PQ Direction. High pressure side P\Q to flow into the positive direction. Consequence: the VQC parse error, fatal
error.
Errors 6 : Main wiring diagram is not finished, implement, equipment is not complete VQCexe e110 Constant initialization.
Consequences: easily lead to constant initialization failed, real-time garbage data appears in the library.
Errors 7 : Control objectives set incorrectly. Please be sure to follow <VQC user setting list > request a list of values to the user.
Consequence: fatal error.
Errors 8 : When the equipment lock alarm occurs, directly to the real-time library VQC Related manual locking information points in
the interval number 0 From the points on the map and then see the red signal of the device locking, but these points are VQC
description information, is not device lock condition, instead of blocking the results of describe, these points by VQC program
automatically refresh sent messages. If its manual count, only cover up the VQC actual operating state the truth. To achieve the goal of
eliminating locking, method 2: first, to <VQC settings > interface locking project related < atresia enabled > Whether it is set to, if
only to test VQC Motion characteristics of the nine, then this setting is restored after the end of the test. Second, view specific
blocking reasons, based on cause-related solutions to eliminate blocking.
Errors 9 : When you perform VQCexe After the command, VQC Error message: " Database tbl_vqcpara Is less than the number of values in
the table Set in the program, please check! "And the cause of this error may be in a 2 :1, the original V2 upgrade their systems to the
VQC1.2 versions later, Not implemented VQCexeu[kV] upgrade command. Please execute the command and then run VQCexe. 2, if you still

have this error, then the upgrade is not complete, no upgrade csc2100_home/config/ Directory of extension to .txt file. Please update these
files from the installation package.
Errors 10 : Bus voltage upper limit and lower limit is not set which voltage ultra-range locking is not enabled properly, voltage too
high or too low are not locked. Specific settings see 2.2 e item description.

4VQC outline
4.1 Topology testing
Table 4 1
Function Test method The phenomenon of Validation
1 Dynamic Colouring principle: Starting from bus
coloring bus voltage is coloring to the
greater than5kV, connected equipment,
After the breaker to switch/Switch
status
2 Main Two main Running screen above
transformer transformers with the Ninth Ward by
side by voltage/Bus clicking on the
side connection between monitor icon to view
low voltage bus theVQCSystem
switch information box,
verify that the
parallel relationship
between the main
transformer is
correctly formed.
(See figure41)
3 Transformer Two main transformer By viewing theVQC
Division with pressure/Bus System information
connection between box, verify that the
low voltage bus parallel relationship
switch between the main
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 71/126
1/10/2017 <br>
switch between the main
transformer is able
to correctly lift
4 Main bus Break of main By viewing theVQC
transformer and bus System information
between the switch box, verify that the
correct master
monitor bus
5 Transformer Break of main By viewing theVQC
capacitor transformer and bus System information
between the switch box, verify that the
correct main
transformer with
capacitive

4 1

Note: only charged coloring on the graphics state, " VQC System information " Box displays connection information for main
transformer. After the breaker ', you can click on this "VQC system information " box below the < Refresh > Refresh button vqcAnalysis of
information.

4.2 Value testing

Table 4 2

Function Test method The phenomenon of Validation

1 Time value Set each timeU View the minimum on
QCosFixed nine-zone diagram show
the correct
value
2 Load value Set each load View the minimum on
segmentUQ nine-zone diagram show
CosFixed value the correct

Note: only charged coloring on the graphics state, nine lower and in real time on the map display. If the upper and lower limits on
nine-zone diagram does not display correctly, please restart the Desk.

4.3 Plate switching tests

Table 4 3

Project Function Test method The phenomenon of Validation

SwitchingVQC Hard Board Hard Board VQCReliable
switching switching switching
Soft plate Soft plate VQCReliable
remote control remote control switching
switching switching
Switching each Hard Board Hard Board Reliable switching
of main switching switching
transformer
Soft plate Soft plate Reliable switching
remote control remote control
switching switching
Switching each Hard Board Hard Board Capacitors for
capacitor switching switching reliable switching
Soft plate Soft plate Capacitors for
remote control remote control reliable switching
switching switching

The following tests can be done by manual simulation, without manual and messages without refreshing the main variable P Q Or bus
voltage U And so may cause device data is locked and cause the test to fail.

4.4 Standard nine-zone test

Table 4 4

Regional Description Strategy Validation

1 UThe lower bound, Vote for capacitors,
CosLower limit rose taps
2 UQualified,Cos Cast capacitor
Lower limit
3 UMore caps,Cos Drop taps
Lower limit
4 UMore caps,Cos Drop taps
Qualified
5 UMore caps,CosMore Capacitors, reducing
ceiling tap
6 UQualified,CosMore Capacitors
ceiling
7 UThe lower bound, Rose connector
CosMore ceiling
8 UThe lower bound, Rose connector
CosQualified
9 No No

4.5 Optimization of nine districts

Table 4 5

Regional Description Strategy Validation

1 U<UL Cast capacitor

Q>QL+Qq Rose connector

2 UL<U<UhUq Cast capacitor

Q>Qh
3 U>Uh Drop taps
Q>Qh

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 72/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Q>Qh
4 U>Uh Drop taps
QhQq<Q<Qh
5 U>Uh Capacitors
Q<QhQq Drop taps
6 UL+Uq<U<Uh Capacitors

Q<QL

7 U<UL Rose connector

Q<QL

8 U<UL Rose connector

QL<Q<QL+Qq

9 No No
10 UhUq<U<Uh Drop taps
Q>Qh
11 UL<U<UL+Uq Rose connector

Q<QL

4.6 Double nine

Table 4 6

Regional Description Strategy Validation

91 High pressure sideU Cast capacitor
Lower limit
Low pressure sideU
Lower limit
92 High pressure sideU Cast capacitor
More ceiling
Low pressure sideU
Qualified
93 High pressure sideU Drop taps
Lower limit
Low pressure sideU
More ceiling
94 High pressure sideU Capacitors
More ceiling
Low pressure sideU
More ceiling
95 High pressure sideU Capacitors
More ceiling
Low pressure sideU
Qualified
96 High pressure sideU Rose connector
More ceiling
Low pressure sideU
Lower limit
1~12 High pressure sideU Nine districts in
Qualified accordance with policy
actions

4.7 Functional testing

Table 4 7

Function Test method The phenomenon of Validation

Voltage limit Transformer
position action in turn,
Parallel you need to
shift of the And taps can be manually replace
main adjusted tap back to
transformer simulate a shift
function phenomenon of
Parallel success
shift
Adjustable Continued
locking positive
regulation
Follow-up is Has been changed
Parallel not adjustable main transformer
shift locking of sequential
occurred process run
when process contrary to
run contrary Is regulation Has been changed
to of main main transformer
transformer of sequential
trip process run
contrary to
Before you not Stop control
starting the group control
first major
regional
change, or an
instruction is
no longer tap
Automatic Two stalls of Program to
correction main automatically
test transformer correct file, pay
differential, attention to the
but in parallel correct
within the principle: only
allowable range in the Act of
of stalls, main transformer
while voltage tap only when
limits. action is needed
for automatic
correction.
Capacitors in
time order, the
Reactive power first capacitor
in a restricted control orders
Cycle location,
switching have been issued,
And there is control the
more than one second
capacitor can capacitance
be switched warning
information
immediately.

If a number of The capacitor
capacitors over atresia,
Refuse test rejection rejection atresia
information

Reactive power Verify that the
is in the upper specified
position, and sequence
there is more
Specified than one
order capacitor can
switching be cut
Capacitor
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 73/126
1/10/2017 <br>
switching be cut
Capacitor
switching
principle
test Verify the
specified cast
Reactive power sequence
is in the lower
position, and
there is more
than one
capacitor can
be cast

A string of Immediately
small-reactance remove
capacitor on
the bus number
Considering is greater than
the size of the string of
capacitor
resistance. reactance
capacitor
Var upper limit First after big
shots of small

If no minimum First cut after

work cut

Taps and
capacitance
Synthetic 1Area,5 according to the
optimization time of
Strategy
testing competition
actions
1Area,5 Taps and
capacitance
according to the
time of
Voltage is competition.
preferred
Voltage limit Start
area, more than automatically"
setting the Strong vote "
switching value reactive device
and tap cannot capabilities.
be Maximum voltage:
the capacitor
voltage lower
limit: strong
cast capacitors.
Capacitor after
all action is
1Area,5 completed and
then adjust tap

Strategy is If there is a
optimal when choice of
nine10Area,11 capacitors, then
Reactive tap, but if you
priority tap no, you can
move capacitor.
10Area: l-
connectors,
capacitors;11
Area: taps,
investment and
capacity
reduction
3Area,7 When the
connector cannot
be adjusted,
capacitor, giving
priority to meet
the demand for
reactive systems.
3Area: switched
capacitor;
7District: vote
for capacitors.
Allow When optimizing When optimizing
sending CosShi, cast CosShi, allows
reactive capacitor area the system to
tests send the ratio of
reactive and
active value must
not exceed this
value
Admit If taps will
cause the
Reference Control voltage reference limit
voltage limit will take
limit precedence to
test ensure controlled
voltage
qualified,
allowing
reference voltage
limit a certain
degree, allows to
set values
prevail.
Should liter tap
command is issued
"Sheng Voltage limit
taps buck
" Set the
Parameter parameters: Taps should send
test l tap buck a drop command
Voltage limit

Tap forward Tap twice time
movement interval to set
interval Voltage limit the time

Tap test Tap reverse Same tap if the
interval two movements in
Voltage limit opposite
directions, two
time intervals
for the time set
(parallel shift
of the main
transformer error
does not escape
this time when
process run
contrary to,)
Tap Hide Joint actions
disturbance should be avoided
time Voltage limit at this time
Tap Finish Tap orders have
time been issued,
Voltage limit escaped this
time, start
checking the
results and
report
Capacitor On the same bus
interval or parallel bus

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 74/126
1/10/2017 <br>
interval or parallel bus
Reactive power capacitance of
limit two time

intervals>=This
set time

Capacitor Capacitance Twice in the same

testing itself capacitor
interval Reactive power operating time to
limit escape
Capacitance When the timer
hide will switch
Reactive power areas, if the
limit
disturbance capacitance of
time the policy
changes, then
zero
Capacitors should
be avoided at
this time

Capacitance Capacitor after

action the Decree,
completed Reactive power escaped this
time limit time, start
checking the
results and
report

4.8 Blocking of main transformer test

In italics for locking items that need equation criteria, whether closed by decision criteria are met. Arial obturated project
controlled by the application logic, does not require additional tuning latch condition, but if you set the locked condition, with
internal logic or relation.
Table 4 8

Control Lock project Test method The phenomenon Validation

no of
0 Soft clamp lock Remote control Locking
input soft plate
1 Hard Strip/In- Conditional Locking the
place locking locking device
The distance/In- Automatic
place plate in unlock
position (remote
1);
Allow input
pressure plate is
in the position
2 Load lock Conditions Locking
blocking: controls
overload
3 Voltage scope Bus voltage the Locking
locking voltage on the controls,
point under the Automatically
upper or lower unlock
limit
4 Voltage change When allowed to Every time you
over a small analyze the shift gears,
lock impact of joint voltage
actions on the changes
voltage, the require more
voltage limit. than tap each
voltage
regulation50%,
if during the
course of
three
successive
tapped control
voltage change
does not meet
the above
requirements,
lock the
device,
manually
unlocking.
5 Bus-bar Medium voltage, Locking
differential low voltage controls
pressure parallel bus-bar
locking differential Automatic
pressure is unlock
greater than the
setting value
6 Main Conditions Locking
transformer blocking: control
protection lock Protection Act of component of
main transformer joint action.
Manually
unlock
7 Rejection Equipment the Locking the
number lock rejection number device,
reaches or manually
exceeds the set unlock
value
8 Number blocking Device count Locking the
reaches or device daily
exceeds the set 0:00 empty
value action times,
automatically
unlock
9 Total number of The total number Alarm
times the alarm of devices
reaches or
exceeds the set
value
10 Action times Action times Locking
11 Communications 1Long, measuring Locking
blocking value does not control group
refresh,
(newspaper Automatic
article on the unlock
related device to
stop or the
number of non-
manual)
2And related
measurement
control device
communication is
interrupted.
12 Slide lock Slide occurs Lock the
device to
manually
unlock
13 Gear Tie stalls are Locking
differential greater than the controls
lock whole of main
transformer
14 Stall limit Stalls under the Tapped control
lock ceiling or the lock this
more limited device,

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 75/126
1/10/2017 <br>
more limited device,
automatically
unlock
15 Body or light Conditional Locking the
gas action locking device, unlock
locking modes set by
the formula

Note: the control group VQC In the main control unit, if there are parallel, then tied together the main transformer of the same
control group.

4.9 Capacitive latching testing

Table 4 9

Control Lock project Test method The phenomenon Validation

no of
0 Soft clamp lock Remote Locking
capacitance
input soft Strip
1 Hard Strip/In- The distance/ Locking the
place locking In-place plate device
in position;
allow input Automatic
pressure plate unlock
is in the
position
2 Protection lock This capacitor Locking the
protection device,
Manually unlock
3 Rejection Equipment the Locking the
number lock rejection number deviceAnd
reaches or manually unlock
exceeds the set
value
4 Number blocking Device count Locking the
reaches or device daily
exceeds the set 0:00 empty
value action times,
automatically
unlock
5 Maintenance The total number Alarm
times to alert of devices
reaches or
exceeds the set
value
6 Communications Measurement Locking the
blocking control device device,
communication is automatically
interrupted unlock
7 Reactive power
capacitance
When the should be less
capacitor than the rated
corresponds to capacity of the
the switch for collection20%,
or lock, unlock
automatically
Reactive power Acquisition of
output does not reactive
correspond to When the capacitance
locking capacitor rated capacity
corresponds to 120% and 80%
the switch for between the
otherwise
locked, unlock
automatically
8 Action times to Action times to Locking the
lock lock device,
Automatic /
manual unlock
9 Bus-bar Parallel bus-bar Locking the
differential differential device,
pressure pressure is Automatically
locking greater than the unlock
setting value
10 Main reasons Atresia of main Locking the
blocking transformer device,
2311 Automatically
unlock

5VQC engineering value list

Note: a italics represents a fixed value for the graphic display of special value, maintained by the program automatically, you do
not need tuning
*Substation generally have the jurisdiction of the Beijing power supply Bureau / Small-reactance capacitor, so global parameter
values ID=12 Fixed-value set to a string of reactance capacitor switching sequence (switching), and need reactive power switch priority
set in the device parameters, as follows: series reactance capacitor high priority, cutting lower priority; string of small-reactance
capacitor instead, cutting high priority, lower priority investment; high priority set 1000 And priority setting 500 ;

5.1 Global parameters

Table 5 1

ID Constant name Meaning

1 VQCDevice address VQCModule analog device to send messages,

you need to specify the address"Default9,
decimal"

2 Control mode Select automatic/Manual/Semi-automatic

control mode "the default automatic"

3 Current control Select control: low voltage, medium voltage

or high voltage "default low voltage"

4 The current reference Reference: low voltage, medium voltage or

high voltage "default free"

5 Consideration of the When the voltage, taking into account the

high-voltage side high voltage side voltage "No "hub

6 Allow poor side stalls Parallel operation of main transformer allows

temporary stalls when poor, exceeds the
barring of all main transformer in parallel "
0 Like allowing Parallax to1, when poor
stall1is not closed, waiting for the next
surge first correct the stalls, then the
normal stall regulation. When the parallel
transformer must be wrong user requirementsn
document at run time, you need to parallel
the main difference between the rated stall
is set ton.

7 Reserved value Reserved value

8 Strong switching at Start strong switching function low voltage

startup voltage limit Busbar voltage limits "0.01"(Priority
control for voltage priority function)

9 Sheng taps booster Transformer high voltage side voltage

constant up taps stalls low voltage voltage/
Reduced? "rise"

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 76/126
1/10/2017 <br>
10 On time/Load the given Select time periods or load take voltage and
value reactive control value "default".

11 Var/Power factor is the Taking reactive for the control variable is

control variable the amount of power factor control "default
power".

12 Reactive device specified Options: cycle switching/Switching order

principles of action specified/Series reactance capacitor
switching order (switching), "switching
default cycle."

13 Control priority Integrated optimization of voltage and

reactive power, voltage first or reactive
indicators priority"Default voltage and
reactive power synthetic optimization"

14 Reserved value Reserved value

15 High side voltage limit (Hub)Boundary limit of main transformer high-

(kV) voltage side voltage value (value5<
considered high voltage>When set to Yes.

16 High voltage side voltage (Hub)Of main transformer high voltage side
lower limit(kV) voltage border bottom values (fixed value5<
considered high voltage>When set to Yes.

17 Allows to send var When optimizingCosShi, allows the system to

degrees send the ratio of reactive and active values
"0Do not allow "

18 Parallel bus-bar Calculation method: (the difference/Bus

differential pressure rated voltage). Parallel bus-bar differential
ratio pressure exceeds the set value, blocking of
main transformer of control "0.02"

19 Control strategy "Optimization"

(Standard nine-zone/ If the policy is<Giving priority to meet
Optimization of nine 500kVRequirementsAVCProgramme>, Select
districts/Double nine the500kVAVCAnd in the" Control " setting
/500kVAVC/500kVVQC) is specified as <High pressure side>,"
Reference " value <Mid-voltage side>
If the policy is<Giving priority to meet
220kVRequirementsAVCProgramme>, Select
the500kVAVCAnd in the" Control " setting
is specified as <Mid-voltage side>,"
Reference " value <High pressure side>
25Districts in the area, control is the
abscissa and references for ordinate

20 Reference side is "Yes"

involved in reactive
power calculation

21 Tap reverse movement time Same transformer tap reverse action time
interval interval "300S

22 Tap time interval Main transformer tap twice in the same time
interval "300S

23 Tap Hide disturbance time Voltage and reactive power in a set period
failed, tap export motion "120S

24 Tap Finish time One tap adjustment time needed for gear
changes the action completes successfully "
30S

25 Tap day allows the total Every day each of the main transformer tap to
number adjust the maximum number of times "15

26 Total number of joints Each main transformer tap requires repair

allow movement total number of movements "3000

27 Tap allowed rejection Each of the main transformer tap allowed

number rejection number, locking joint action
exceeds this value, manually unlock "1

28 Capacitor own interval Interval of the same capacitor "300S

29 Different capacitor set The same bus (including parallel buses) on

of intervals the interval of the two capacitors "300S

30 Capacitance hide Voltage and reactive power failed in a set

disturbance time time, the capacitor will export "60S

31 Capacitor action A capacitor switching actions needed to

completed time complete the switch position change
successful "10S

32 Capacitors allow every Capacitors are the maximum number of actions

day action times per group per day (throwing and cutting is an
action) "15

33 Capacitor allows the Capacitors need to overhaul the total number

total number in each group "4000

34 The capacitor allowed Each capacitor allowed rejection number,

rejection number exceeding this value blocking capacitor "1

36 Total resetID32 VQCCorresponds to the reset button remote

(Open signal)

45 Term of validity whether Set values are valid term whether to enable
the setting is enabled "no"

46 Allowing reference When the control voltage and reference

voltage more limited voltage does not meet the requirements at the
degree same time, allows reference voltage the more
limited degree, ensure controlled voltage
qualified "0

47 VQCHigh voltage side VQCTo pick from multiple voltage

voltage transformer need their own control of main
transformer,You need to specifyVQCThe
control of main transformer high voltage side
voltage
48 AVCPacket receive AVCPacket receive interval (minutes) "15
interval "Master stationAVCUsed when

37 Whether receivingAVC Virtual remote to provideAVCCertain local

Fixed value manual switching function requires a function
button on the graphics configuration
associated to that point, achieving click
inverse function, which1SaidVQCReceive
AVCConstant value0SaidVQCDoes not
receiveAVCConstant value control is subject
to local values.

5.2 Parameters of main transformer

Table 5 2
ID Constant name Meaning
1 Center stall1 Transformer transition document, such as
7~(8)~9~(10)~11, Which810As the
center stall
2 Center stall2 Transformer transition document, such as
7~(8)~9~(10)~11, Which810As the
center stall
3 Center stall3 Ditto
(Reservations)
4 Center stall4 Ditto
(Reservations)
19 Setting Group Setting group, the selection of current
transformer;vqcSupport for multiple

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 77/126
1/10/2017 <br>
transformer;vqcSupport for multiple
sets of values, summer/Winter setting
when you switch, change this value.
28 Allow minimum Allow minimum shift
shift
29 Allows maximum Allows maximum shift
shift
5 Startup timeID Select the timer starts after the action
object, and corresponding telemetryID32
6 Action timeID Tap a time after completion of the
action Act zero timer, remote that
corresponds to the pointID32
7 Action equipment For the storage of equipmenteleID32
TelemetryID32
8 Direction of To store the remote points in the
motion direction ofID32
9 Control voltageID Stores control voltageID32
10 Reference voltage Storing reference voltageID32
ID
11 VarID Telemetry used to store reactive power
valueID32
12 Power factorID To store the power factor value of the
telemetryID32
13 The Group tied for Used to store the Group refers to both
number of main the number of main transformer in
transformer telemetryID32
14 UnlockID Unlock button corresponding to the
remote signalID32
15 Allowed into the Allowed into the soft strip of main
soft StripID transformer, support remote control
16 Capacitor voltage Nine-zone diagram display, used for
variationID storing capacitor voltage variation of
telemetryID32
17 Capacitor/Power Nine-zone diagram display for storage of
factor variation capacitors of reactive power/Power
1ID factor variation1TelemetryID32
18 Capacitor/Power Nine-zone diagram display, used for
factor variation storing capacitor reactive when voted/
2ID Power factor variation2TelemetryID32
20 Current voltage Control voltage lower limit
lower limit
21 Current voltage Control voltage limit
limit
22 The current lower The current lower limit reference
limit reference voltage
voltage
23 The current The current reference voltage limit
reference voltage
limit
24 Current power Current power factor floor
factor floor

25 Current power Current power factor limit

factor limit
26 Reactive current Reactive current limit
limit
27 Reactive current Reactive current limit
limit

Through a graphical list of parameter settings -The electric properties, as shown in Figure 51

5 1
Table 5 3

ID Constant name Meaning

Rated voltage of High voltage rated voltage "nameplates"

high voltage side
(kV)

Medium voltage Medium voltage rated voltage "nameplates"

rated voltage(kV)

Low voltage rated Low voltage rated voltage "nameplates"

voltage(kV)

High voltage Corresponding rated voltage of the transformer

rated gear each side for tap stalls

High pressure Total number of transformer taps stalls

side stalls total (Centre stalls)

Stall voltage Tap step voltage ratio: if it is1.25%, Then

rate of change fill in0.0125

Through a graphical list of parameter settings Real-time data definition (when there is no corresponding point set 0 ) As in Figure
52

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 78/126
1/10/2017 <br>

5 2
Table 5 4

ID Constant name Meaning
1 High-voltage side Corresponds to the high-voltage side of active
of active remote sensing

(If the high voltage side is not collection,

edit the formula, and generate virtual points.
Similar to the following)
2 Voltage and Corresponds to the high-voltage side reactive
reactive power power telemetry
3 Medium-voltage Corresponds to the medium-voltage side of
side of active active remote sensing
4 Mid-voltage side Mid-voltage side reactive power and
reactive power corresponding telemetry
5 High pressure Voltage corresponds to the stalls of telemetry
side of the stall
8 Tap l remote Sheng taps corresponding remote control point
control
9 Tap drop remote Reducing connector remote control that
control corresponds to the point
10 Tap Stop remote Stop taps corresponding remote control point
control

5.3 Reactive power device parameters

By VQC Set the interface setting parameter list
Table 5 5

ID Constant name Meaning

1 Vote priorities Specify the order cast, larger, cast the
higher the priority
2 Priority Specify the cutting order, the larger,
higher priority
3 Voltage Switching capacitance bus voltage variation
regulation in the percentage of control, is generally
derived from operation data (allow stronger
investment and strong cutting, or when in
order to prevent shocks switching of
capacitors, which need to be set to the
maximum value, which is calculated when
transformer no-load data). General:110kV
substation3MVarcapacitor1.8%,220kV8MVar
capacitor3%
4 Reservation
5 Action timeID Var equipment time after completion of the
action Act zero timer, remote that
corresponds to the pointID32
6 UnlockID Unlock button corresponding to the remote
signalID32(1for in-place location,
otherwise in your library configuration
tool in real time the remote signal
inversion so that it can provide)
7 Allowed into the Soft plate allowed into the reactive
soft StripID equipment, support remote control

Through a graphical list of parameter settings -The electric properties, as shown in Figure 53 , Figure 54

5 3

Table 5 6
ID Constant name Meaning
Device type Indicates the device is a capacitor or a
reactor
Reactive When the reactive equipment rated voltage
equipment rated rated capacity
capacity (MVar)

5 4

Through a graphical list of parameter settings Real-time data definition (when there is no corresponding point set 0 )
Table 5 7

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 79/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Table 5 7

ID Constant name Meaning

1 Switch number Reactive remote point of the device
corresponds to the switchID32
2 Switches, remote Reactive device switch of the remote
control control that corresponds to the point
ID32
3 Reactive Indicates that reactive power the actual
injection reactive power output telemetry equipment

5.4VQC blocking list

In this list in the settings interface, where you can add a locking item, set the locked condition, and select the lock item is
valid. Due to space issues, locking condition is not listed in the table, locking condition is like @D12&&!@D1, and@A1>20 of logical
expressions. @D12 representative ID for 12 remote;@A1 representative ID 1 Remote measurement. Blocked state listed below can be sent to
dispatch in the listed order.
Table 5 8

Device
name Device
type Locking
ID Lock name Locking
mode Unlock
method Is valid
Hard plate Automatic
VQC VQC device 0 lock Locking unlock Effective

Soft clamp Automatic

VQC VQC device 1 lock Locking unlock Effective

All of main Transformer 0 Soft clamp Locking Automatic Effective

transformer type lock unlock
Main Transformer 1 Hard Strip/ Locking Automatic Effective
transformer type Lock unlock
Main Transformer 2 Load lock Locking Automatic Effective
transformer type unlock
All of main Transformer 3 Voltage scope Locking Automatic Effective
transformer type locking unlock
Voltage change
All of main Transformer 4 over a small Locking Manually Invalid
transformer type lock unlock

Bus-bar
All of main Transformer 5 differential Locking Automatic Effective
transformer type pressure unlock
locking
Main
Main Transformer transformer Manually
transformer type 6 protection Locking unlock Effective
lock
All of main Transformer Rejection Manually
transformer type 7 number Locking unlock Effective

All of main Transformer 8 Number Locking Automatic Effective

transformer type blocking unlock
All of main Transformer 9 Total number Alarm Manually Effective
transformer type of actions to unlock
All of main Transformer Automatic
transformer type 10 Action times Locking / Manual Invalid

Main Transformer Communications Automatic

transformer type 11 blocking Locking unlock Effective

All of main Transformer 12 Slide lock Locking Automatic Effective

transformer type unlock

All of main Transformer Gear Automatic

transformer type 13 differential Locking unlock Effective
lock
All of main Transformer Automatic
transformer type 14 Stall alarm Alarm unlock Effective

Main Transformer Body of light Automatic

transformer type 15 gas lock Locking unlock Effective

All Capacitive Soft clamp Automatic

capacitive type 0 lock Locking unlock Effective
reactance
Capacitive Capacitive Hard Strip/ Automatic
reactance type 1 Locking unlock Effective
Lock
Capacitive Capacitive 2 Protection Locking Manually Effective
reactance type lock unlock
All
capacitive Capacitive 3 Rejection Locking Manually Effective
reactance type number unlock

All
capacitive Capacitive 4 Day of action Locking Automatic Effective
type times unlock
reactance
All Capacitive Total number Manually
capacitive type 5 of actions to Alarm unlock Effective
reactance
Capacitive Capacitive Communications Automatic
reactance type 6 blocking Locking unlock Effective

Reactive power
All Capacitive output does Automatic
capacitive type 7 not correspond Locking unlock Invalid
reactance
to locking
All Capacitive Action times Automatic
capacitive type 8 to lock Locking / Manual Invalid
reactance
All Bus parallel
capacitive Capacitive 9 differential Locking Automatic Effective
reactance type locking unlock

All
capacitive Capacitive 10 External Locking Manually Invalid
type manual locking unlock
reactance

Note:Voltage change over a small lock--- Twice in a row after a surge voltage does not adjust the direction changes, lock the adjustment of main
transformer. If the voltage fluctuation is large (if steel load), Hutch.

6VQC message format

6.1 Locking status messages
Transformers Group number 0x07:(1#T~5#T) Group, 0x17:(6#T~10#T) group number 0x27:(11#T~15#T)
Specifications 6 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 T1 T1 T1 Parallel T1 T1 Voltage T1 T1 Hard T1

Rejection Protection bus-bar Action ultra-range Load Strip / Locking
number lock differential is too locking lock Pressing
lock pressure little plate
locking locking lock

S3 T1 Body T1 Stall T1 File T1 T1 T1 T1 Total T1

or light alarm level Sliding Communications number Number
gas locking lock blocking Action of lock

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 80/126
1/10/2017 <br>
gas locking lock blocking Action of lock
action times alarms
action
locking

S10 T5 T5 T5 Parallel T5 T5 Voltage T5 T5 Hard T5

Rejection Protection bus-bar Action ultra-range Load Strip / Locking
number lock differential is too locking lock Pressing
lock pressure little plate
locking locking lock

S11 T5 Body T5 Stall T5 Gear T5 T5 T5 T5 Total T5

or light alarm differential Sliding Communications number Number
gas lock lock blocking Action of lock
action times alarms
action
locking

: :
Reactive equipment: group number 0x08 (01#C~05#C) Group, 0x38 (16#C~20#C)

: :
Group number 0x18 (06#C~10#C) group number 0x48 (21#C~25#C)

Group number 0x28:(11#C~15#C) group number 0x58: (26#C~30#C)

Table 6 2
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 Hard C1
Reactive Communications Total Number Rejection Protection Strip / Locking
power blocking number lock atresia lock Pressing
output of plate lock
does not alarms
correspond
to locking

S3 reserved reserved reserved reserved Reservation C1 C1 Bus-bar C1

External differential Number
manual pressure lock
locking locking

S10 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 Hard C5
Reactive Communications Total Number Rejection Protection Strip / Locking
power blocking number lock atresia lock Pressing
output of plate lock
does not alarms
correspond
to locking

S11 reserved reserved reserved reserved Reservation C5 C5 Bus-bar C1

External differential Number
manual pressure lock
locking locking

6.2 Result message

Results of transformer Group numbers 0x02:(1#T~11#T)
Table 6 3
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 Reserved Reserved T1 Drop T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Miss

success Rising Remote Cannot Sliding operation
success control adjust gear
to fail

S11 Reserved Reserved T10 Drop T10 T10 T10 T10 T10 Miss
success Rising Remote Cannot Sliding operation
success control adjust gear
to fail

Results of capacitor Group numbers 0x03:(1#C~22#C)

Table 6 4
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 C2 C2 Since C2 C2 Miss C1 C1 Since C1 C1 Miss

Remote the Investment operation Remote the Investment operation
control successful success control successful success
to fail to fail

S12 C22 C22 Since C22 C22 Miss C21 C21 Since C21 C21 Miss
Remote the Investment operation Remote the Investment operation
control successful success control successful success
to fail to fail

6.3 Action message

(Manual, semi-automatic regulation of sending) Group number:0x0d:0x1D:0x2d
Table 6 5
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 T8 Pre T7 Pre T6 Pre T5 Pre T4 Pre T3 Pre T2 Pre T1 Pre

fall fall fall fall fall fall fall fall

S3 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
Preloading Preloading Preloading Preloading Preloading Preloading Preloading Preloading

S4 C8 Pre- C7 Pre- C6 Pre- C5 Pre- C4 Pre- C3 Pre- C2 Pre- C1 Pre-

S5 C8 Pre-cut C7 Pre-cut C6 Pre-cut C5 Pre-cut C4 Pre-cut C3 Pre-cut C2 Pre-cut C1 Pre-cut

S6 C16 Pre- C15 Pre- C14 Pre- C13 Pre- C12 Pre- C11 Pre- C10 Pre- C9 Pre-

S7 C16 Pre- C15 Pre- C14 Pre- C13 Pre- C12 Pre- C11 Pre- C10 Pre- C9 Pre-cut
cut cut cut cut cut cut cut

S11 C32 Pre- C31 Pre- C30 Pre- C29 Pre- C28 Pre- C27 Pre- C26 Pre- C25 Pre-
cut cut cut cut cut cut cut cut

6.4 Global messages

Group number 0x0B
Table 6 6
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

S1 Alarm Fault

S2 Manually Semi- Automatic Control High Reference Controlled 9 / Non- 9

automatic mode objectives pressure side low (1/0)
mode Q/Cos(1/0) side voltage
side

S3 The VQC Hard VQC Soft VQC Allows Sheng / Load (1/0) Allows
distance plate Strip Device predict taps strong
AVC input inputs input changes booster switching
Model (combined in
signal) voltage

S4 T8 Input T7 Input T6 Input T5 Input T4 Input T3 Input T2 Input T1 Input

S5 T16 T15 Input T14 Input T13 Input T12 T11 Input T10 Input T9 Input
Input Input

S6 T20 T19 Input T18 Input T17 Input

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 81/126
1/10/2017 <br>
S6 T20 T19 Input T18 Input T17 Input
Input

S7 C8 Input C7 Input C6 Input C5 Input C4 Input C3 Input C2 Input C1 Input

S8 C16 C15 Input C14 Input C13 Input C12 C11 Input C10 Input C9 Input
Input Input

S9 C24 C23 Input C22 Input C21 Input C20 C19 Input C18 Input C17 Input
Input Input

S10 C32 C31 Input C30 Input C29 Input C28 C27 Input C26 Input C25 Input
Input Input

11 C40 C39 Input C38 Input C37 Input C36 C35 Input C34 Input 33 Input
Input Input

6.5 Remote message

Table 6 7 The day of action times

Data type Message example Related equipment

30 30 30 T01 1#~12#
T02......
31 30 31 C01 1#~12# capacitors
C02......
32 30 32 C13 13#~24# capacitors
C14......
33 30 33 C25 25#~36# capacitors
C26......
Table 6 8 Current area of main transformer

Data type Message example Related equipment

34 30 34 T01 1#~12#
T02......
Table 6 9 Current value ( Several sets of values)

Data type Message example Related equipment

35 30 35 TSET
Table 6 10 Total number of movements

Data type Message example Related equipment

60 30 60 T1 T2...... 1#~06#
61 30 61 T7 T8...... 7#~12#
62 30 62 C1 C2...... 1#~6# capacitors
63 30 63 C7 C8...... 7#~12# capacitors
64 30 64 C13 C14
......
13#~18# capacitors

65 30 65 C19 C20
......
19#~24# capacitors

66 30 66 C25 C26
......
25#~30# capacitors

67 30 67 C30 C31
......
30#~36# capacitors

6.6 Remote message

Table 6 11

Object number Function code Description

1 B4/BC SwitchingVQC total
input clamp
2 B4/BC ReturnVQC
3 B4/BC Switching1#
transformer inputs
press plate
4 B4/BC Switching2#
transformer inputs
press plate

22 B4/BC Switching20#
transformer inputs
press plate
23 B4/BC Switching1#
capacitors clamps
24 B4/BC Switching1#
capacitors clamps

The eighth chapter Integrated five-prevention operation

Directory

1FIVE-PREVENTION OPERATION TICKET EDITING PERMISSIONS
2UNIFIED DESCRIPTION OF THE MATCHING SYMBOLS
3FIVE EDITS MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
3.1INTERVAL TEMPLATE

3.2INTERVAL INFORMATION

3.3FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

3.4TICKET TEMPLATE

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 82/126
1/10/2017 <br>
3.5PRINT TICKET TEMPLATE

3.6ADDITIONAL TOOLS

3.7EDITING AFTER SAVE

4SYSTEM CAPACITY DESCRIPTION

5THE INITIALIZATION OF A COMPUTER KEY
5.1FORM THE KEY INITIALIZATION FILE

5.2LOCTAB.FILFILE

5.3KTNDAT.FILFILE

5.4TYPTAB.FILFILE

5.5OVERWRITE THEBASTX0.FILFILE

5.6DATA AND INITIALIZE THE KEY

6ENGINEERING CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION

6.1CREATE INTERVAL TEMPLATE

6.2CREATE INTERVAL

6.3CONFIGURATION LOCK

6.4CONFIGURATION TERMINOLOGY

6.5CONFIGURING TEMPLATES

7FIVE PROFILE DESCRIPTION

8ENGINEERING FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONSFAQ
8.1VIRTUAL REMOTE INSTRUCTIONS

8.2WEB PORTAL AND GROUND HOW TO CREATE

8.3SEVERAL OPERATING MECHANISM IS INSTALLED A DEVICE LOCK, HOW TO DEAL WITH

8.4WHEN MULTIPLE DEVICES (SUCH AS DEVICE, DEVICEB) CONSISTS OF A MECHANICAL LOCK (PADLOCK) LOCKED, HOW TO DEAL WITH

8.5PHENOMENON: FIVE PREVENTION DEVICE IS CONFIGURED, FIVE-PREVENTION OPERATION IN GRAPHICS BUT DO NOT HAVE THIS DEVICE

1 Five-prevention operation ticket editing permissions

Information about five-prevention operation, you need to" Five edits " setting in the module. But only the logged in
user has " five anti-edit " permission, users can make five-prevention operation ticket edits. Permissions in the " user
management " module settings, as shown below. In the " user group permission settings " page, add the appropriate user
group (such as the super users group, maintenance personnel), set this permission. Set up as shown in the " super user ",
in the lower right corner will be " five edits " play tick, you can change permissions for a user group.

1 1

But this result holds only one of the real-time library, if the entire system (includes primary and backup server)
restart, this action results in the loss, it needs to be saved to the commercial gallery. Click on" user management "
page, click on the " Save data ", to save the data to the business library.

1 2

Such settings, start menu in the system" Database management " Xia " five edits " menu is available, the menu as
shown below.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 83/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 3

2 Unified description of the matching symbols

All in terms of matching symbols( Includes template name ), can be combined.
Terms are eventually converted into concrete actions in the operation, the conversion is done by matching action in
terms of matching symbols.
$DV : Represents the device name; 1011

$SET : Represents the interval; (Available in the template name)

$CB : Represents the interval the main switch; 101(available in the template name)

$TYPE : Subtype names such as: bus-side switch, bus side knife

$BEFORES : Represents the operation status

$AFTERS : Represents state after operation

$BPSET : Interval name (only used in the template name)

$BPCB : Interval owner name (only used in the template name)

3 Five edits maintenance instructions

In the monitoring" Database management " option in the " five anti-edit " option, after running interface as shown in
the following figure.

3 1

This five-edit function is to maintain five-proof editing of the underlying data platforms, template, template,
interval, the total interval information, other information, print the tickets five item editing capabilities.

3.1 Interval template

Substation equipment is based on the specific scheduling number and types of equipment-specific, such as:"112 circuit
breaker ", which "112" is the device schedule number," circuit breaker " is the type of equipment description. Operation
ticket system in accordance with the principles of substation equipment in order to describe and to discriminate, and
space for classification. Interval template is mainly to build a substation, there are all kinds of equipment
description, and hosted and managed according to the interval pattern.
Click on the" Every template ", in the list box on the left is divided into " every template " and " interval second
template "system to classify one or two types of equipment set up and manage. Use the mouse to click " every template ",
the editing interface as shown in the following figure.

3 2

For administrative purposes, the template is divided into intervals, in the main the same interval,PT spacing, bus
interval and other intervals. If need increased a line interval, with mouse selected line interval and click mouse right
key, pop-up right key menu following figure, selected menu within " increased template " will pop-up template name edit
box, in edit box within entered need established of interval template name, click determine, such on in line interval
within established has a line interval template, but at template content for empty. Template was established some sort of
connection mode of substation equipment contained within the kind of device you describe and manage, so to add category
descriptions in the template.

3 3

Mouse double-click the name of the new interval (such as two female leads), edit interface on the right side of the
form, click on the button with the right of the first column to open the right-click menu, as shown below, select" To
add ", and will increase the line device type description editing, in the " device type name " enter the interval has a
device type (for example: line cutters), the primary device type system has been defined in advance, mouse appears
double-click the drop down list, select the new device in the list belong to the kind of device. Flags are defined in the
device type in the invoicing process with default properties.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 84/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 4

3-4 , interval listed in the table on the right device, double-click a device " symbol " column pop-up menu as shown
below.

3 5

Specific meanings are as follows:

Satellite operations: automatically when invoicing " / " Operation " check / check " operation.

Knife before the ground operation test: grounding equipment " " Operation automatically increases inspection operations.

Does not appear in the printed ticket: operation of this type of equipment in operation on the printed output does not appear on
the face of the ticket.
Electric: the device type can be remotely operated from the background.
Ground: ground equipment symbol.
Web Portal: Portal device flag.
Five-prevention operation rules for new device types are defined. Selected equipment, click right key pop-up rules
edit interface following figure by shows, equipment name description has for rules description of equipment type, click"
added group " increased a conditions, again click " increased rules items ", rules items within description has operation
the equipment Shi participation locking of other equipment of State, rules items within equipment State is " and " The
relationship. Rule groups within different conditions that are " or " relationship. If the device can be any of you "
type " Select " unconditionally ".

3 6

3.1.1 Notes

Interval template information is stored in"Project/OPN/OPN_Tmplt.txt ", modify the interval template needs to be
synchronized to other computers.

3.2 Interval information

Establish interval template already substation equipment types and describes the connection mode, interval
information primarily is a description of the interval template specific, actual device in substation number and types of
its established relationship.
Click on the" Interval information " switch to the editing interface as shown in the following figure:

3 7

3.2.1 Create a space separated

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 85/126
1/10/2017 <br>
First create an empty space, right-click the left tree nodes" Interval information ", pop-up menu, click on "
increase the idle " eject after entering interval dialog box, type creates an empty after the interval name interval.

3 8

After you create a space separated, after you set the interval property, you can" Created from the template space
equipment ", or " the replication interval " to create spacing device, can also be manually created between devices.

3.2.2 Set the interval property

Idle after it is created, double-click the" Interval information ", pop up property information for all intervals to
determine the " measurement interval ", and" master switches ", and" every type " property.

3 9

3.2.3 Created from the template spacing device

Interval is created, set the interval attribute, based on the interval type to create spacing devices. Right click
the interval that you want to create a device, eject the right-click menu as shown below.

3 10

On the right click menu" Created from the template space equipment ", a pop-up dialog box in the following figure.
Select create primary device and the secondary device template, select the remote signal that corresponds to each type of
equipment, if there is no remote directly to " create " the tick.

3 11

For example to create a device: in the above dialog box" A template " page from the " template list " Select the
created interval corresponds to the interval you want in the template, double-click the device corresponding to the type
of " associated remote signal " column of the grid (" associated remote signal " Is going to be creating specific
equipment remote signal corresponding to the database in real time of the establishment of relations), a pop-up dialog
box, as shown in the following figure. Double click to select a remote signal associated with the device, so that "
created " in that column, check automatically expressed the need to create this type of equipment. Finally, click on the
map on the " identify " button, creating space equipment.

3 12

3.2.4 Replication interval

Interval is created, set the interval attribute, or you can" The replication interval " to create spacing device. For
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 86/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Interval is created, set the interval attribute, or you can" The replication interval " to create spacing device. For
a substation of a voltage level of line interval, interval connection mode, the relative address of the device data and
other information are the same, you can according to the interval template after you create the intervals, in this
interval based on the replication interval to create other space equipment. Click on the interval tree right-click menu "
copy space ", a pop-up dialog box in the following figure. Interval information is the purpose on the right, the left is
the source intervals corresponding information.
For example,110kV Zhong Zhongjia and Zhong Zhongyi line spacing information are exactly the same, to create good
"110kV Zhong Zhongjia line " intervals, and then create a space separated "110kV Zhong Zhongyi line ", click the right
mouse button menu replication interval. The following figure, in the dialog box, select a source five intervals "110kV
Zhong Zhongjia line "when the program automatically refresh " corresponds to the collection interval list ", choose the
intervals in the list, double-click in the list on the right corresponds to the interval. For example, in the figure
below, select the collection on the left every "110kV Zhong Zhongjia line ", double-click on the right corresponds to the
collection interval "110kV Zhong Zhongyi line ". Click Copy to complete "110kV Zhong Zhongyi line " interval device
creation.

3 13

When an interval, for a device is not configured for remote, device naming according to the original interval.
Interval after replication, need to check the created device.
In addition, if between the remote and switch on the monitor is not configured, then a device names may not be
created based on the template.
Creating device information, as shown in Figure3-9 Among them, the equipment of " name " and " switch " from the
monitor automatically gets the scheduling number and description information, and therefore requests that the drawing
monitor input when a wiring drawing " electrical properties " " device name " and " Device names describe ", if changes
to the graphics of the two," switch " column automatically changes" name " columns manually modified. Remote, device
type, marking and rules is realization of the template gallery items. Or modify the item, modify the method with the "
interval template " related changes.

3.2.5 Device refresh interval

Interval information displayed, double-click the tree on the left side of an interval of one device, open the table
on the right. If" the replication interval " or " created from the template space equipment " zhihou, click on the
Refresh button to refresh on the right-click menu, double-click the " equipment " does not refresh. Refresh the menu as
shown in the following figure.

3 14

Notes:Five, a device name is created from a template, or when an interval, based on monitoring switches in switch name, but can be
modified. Switch switch name when monitoring changes, a device does not automatically modify the five names.

3.2.6 Device properties settings

The right-click menu of the device as shown in the following figure, General editing, edit the device lock
information and rules. The right-click menu as shown below.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 87/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 15

3.2.6.1 Five anti-lock information:

Installing five anti-lock device, to be defined for the device lock code (the lock code16 in binary notation, valid
range:0x100-0x3FF), through the right mouse button to open the right-click menu, as shown in the image above, select "
five anti-lock information ", to configure the device lock code, as shown in the following figure. Already configured a
device lock, a lock icon is displayed in the list of devices.

3 16

Master lock: Lock code that is installed on the device, do not install locks don't change. Master Lock lock can be configured
properties: mechanical lock (padlock), electric lock, a virtual lock (no time to lock that is used to prompt information on the key,
keys can be skipped).
Check lock: Installation on the equipment used for checking the operation of lock code lock is not installed is not changed.
Check lock: Installed on the equipment used for checking the operation of lock code lock is not installed is not changed.
Electric lock inspectionGrounding equipment in operation to check the voltage before the lock code, do not install locks don't
change.
Has been configured on the lock when you need to get rid of, direct input "0x0", click on " determined " .

Notes:Now create a lock range requested for:0x100~0x3FF

3.2.6.2 Five rules:

Rules modifications for a device template rules are basically the same as interval, modify a device Rule dialog box as
shown in the following figure.

3 17

3.2.6.3 Associated lock

Related locks: operation of equipment is needed before and after the operation of locks. Configuration dialog box as shown below.
Add, delete, menu right click on the table to appear, use this menu to add or remove.

3 18

By manipulating the configuration device lock information, as shown below.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 88/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 19

, The lock symbol meanings are as follows:

Before operation: as above, check the 1102 Associate switch operation is required before operating the lock, or 1102 Associated switch
when needed to operate the locks;
Equipment operation: check indicates that the corresponding equipment operation before or after this Association lock operation;
QianNeed to manipulate the lock number is0x101The associated lock, lock the name of this
As shown above, 1102 Switch Operation
Association is 1102 Doors, as a Web portal.

3.3 For additional information

3.3.1 Primary equipment operation

In establishing a device types we only general description of the basic features of a device (such as line switches,
bus switch, line cutters, etc), and actual operation order for each type of device operation is detailed and accurate
description, for example opening a" Circuit breaker " operation described as " Open XX line XX switches and check
position ". " Circuit breaker " is the master device, and " Open XX line XX switch and check the position " is a "
circuit breaker " main terminology, that is in conformity with the provisions within the operation of the circuit breaker
operation description. Therefore, for each type of equipment you want to modify the terms meet the needs of field
operations. The term is primarily used to edit maintenance operations, operator interface as shown in the following
figure.

3 20

Above each column in the table as follows:

Type: the type of main equipment
Operating name: input string action name
Operation status: 1 -1 indicated that he did not consider operation status analysis.

Operation status: after this operation corresponds to the operation, such as opening operations, operations status 0 ; Check
operation, the corresponding operation status 1 ; For after the test operation because it does not parse operation status, need to fill
out- 1 ;

Operation term: term this action corresponds to the operation, you need to match symbols;
Flag: for testing, inspection, inspection operation, you need to " Detection " tick;

Corresponding check operation: for opening and closing operations of the need to select the corresponding check, check-in-action;
In addition, click on the " Prompted ", to see the action terms, each matching symbols mean.
This module also provides associated action function. So-called associated actions, that is, before or after an
action, automatically brought into operation in action. Right-click a device record, a pop-up menu in the following
figure, click on" information for the associated action " can be configured.

3 21

Information for the associated action configuration dialog box as shown in the following figure. Diagram,
configuration: open all switches before or after the operation, to check the switch lights and meter status. Which
meaning of the wildcard characters to the same operation term.

3 22

Notes:Associated actions appears on the ticket made out in the following order:
Operation of Association operations1
Operation of Association operations2
Operation
Operations after the associated operation2
Operations after the associated operation1

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 89/126
1/10/2017 <br>
: For distribution in the open switch on the associated action, open 501 Operation corresponds to the tickets for:
Check501 switch instructs the green light
Check501 switch meter instructions for 0
Open501 switch
Check the switch indicates red light
Check mark indicates no0

3.3.2 Secondary equipment operation

Secondary device is similar to a device operation.

3.3.3 A device type, secondary equipment subtype

All device types are" Device type " and " secondary device subtype " in the table, there is generally no need to
edit. If you need to manually add a new device type, just add.

3.3.4 Lock table

Displays configuration information for all locks in the system. Tables can be edited, sorted, printed, easy to see
them.

3.3.5 Associated lock table

Shows all objects in the system configuration information for the associated lock. Tables can be edited, sorted,
printed, easy to see them.

3.4 Ticket template

Template store" Automatic billing " typical operation of the function call. Can be increased after invoicing template
to save the tickets by hand, you can edit it.
Template includes: typical ticket templates and generic template. Among them, the generic template, applied to
different intervals you can open different ticket for the same wiring and equipment lines with the voltage intervals just
opened a general ticket template (General more than more than 10 tickets), which greatly reduced the operation Setup.
Typical ticket templates are defined in the template a specific interval of device-specific templates (classic template
associated with a specific interval).
For ease of management, and to stop the ticket template/ Transmission category, the applicable interval type, voltage
level. When you need to increase the ticket template, right click in the corresponding category, appears below the menu,
templates can be added, deleted, and so on.

3 23

3.4.1 Add new ticket template

Click on the" Add template ", the following dialog box appears, enter the appropriate information, then click OK, you
can create a new ticket template.

3 24

After the new template, click on the table headers to the right, pop-up menu, as shown below, to increase ticket
templates subkey.

3 25

In the template lines, action type" Equipment ", and" device type ", and" secondary ", and" secondary device type
"and the" next-generation device type ", and" Next-generation device type II ", and" other "in the following figure. When
selecting a / after the second device can be " devices " select specific equipment, such as 101 switching,101 plate; when
you select XX device type, in the " devices " Select the abstract device, such as reclosing pressure plate and circuit
breaker; when you select other, you can input text if the operation when matching characters appear in the text, you need
to " devices " select matching breaks instead of a device.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 90/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 26

In the above illustration, text operation2 way, an automatically generated (that is, select " automatically generate
action text "), one is manually entered. Automatically generated, then select " action types ", and" devices " and "
action ", select " action items, " Hou, based on a device / secondary equipment configuration information on the action
terms, Operation is automatically generated text manually when you enter, you can manually input text. Operation analysis
of the specific content of the text is by actions in the template text, matching symbols instead of specific device
information or interval. Operation specific information is by ticket template in the " action type ", and" devices "and
the" action items " analysis, judgment summons, remote control operation system, is not affected because the action text
modifications.

3.4.2 Volume increased ticket template

Available through " Additional tools " " typical text import " function, batch import template. See in particular "3.6 additional
tools ".

3.4.3 General ticket template

General ticket, you can" Automatic billing " for a specific interval for invoicing, request template name with a
wildcard symbol (such as *, and& ), as shown in the following figure.

3 27

3.4.4 The typical ticket template

Typical ticket contains a device-specific information and cannot be used for other devices, the template name does
not contain wildcard characters. Save as template of hand-drawn, this is fixed in the following figure.

3 28

3.4.5 Template editor:

In order to facilitate the editing of template, increases the template's text editor. Click on the " Toggle editor " can switch
between Forms editor and text editor. The text editor as shown below:

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 91/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 29

Among them, the find and replace functionality provided via a shortcut key. Enter the characters to search for in find edit box,
enter or type "CTRL+f" . Enter the character to be replaced in the replace edit box, type carriage return or "CTRL+r" , and replace
each one. " Find next " shortcut keys "CTRL+r".

3.4.6 Notes

To close the child window on the right (click on the top left of the pictured"X"), automatically saves the template
content to the system project/OPN/ntl/ Directory. Double-click to the left of the tree did not initiate the refresh, you
need to close the child window and reopen it. After you modify the template content, you need to close the child window
(that is automatically saved to the file), and then sync to other computers. If you modify a template property, you need
to " Save in real time ".

3.4.7 Old versions of the data upgrade

1.2.1.9 previous versions (including 1.2.1.9) upgrade, the original template automatically default to the generic
template, you need to manually modify template properties.

3.5 Print ticket template

3 30

Modifying print ticket form, click on the" Template " enter the editing interface, print black text and a border is
free to modify, modify the way EXCEL table editing. Red text is a system-generated variables, based on the field to place
it in the desired location in the format. First select a table cell, and then from the " Properties " menu, select "
variables " defined, choose the form you need to define the variables and display format, confirm completion.
Click a cell in the table grid, pop-up context menu as shown in the following figure. Set variable, set operating
parameters, formatting cells.

3 31

Setting variables, including the (current) time, the task name (name), ticket number, page number, and so on. Set
variable dialog box shown in the following figure. And sets the variables you can set different display rules.

3 32

Operation parameter definition, as shown below, including the terms/ Position definitions, numbering definitions.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 92/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 33

" Term / definition of" pages like the one above, to operation of head / tail fixation, each page defines terms, if
there is no blank. To define action items, starting at the, the words of each line system based on the font size and the
width of the table wrap.
Numbering definition, as shown below. Ticket number supporting a action ticket page increment number, also supports
more than a ticket for the operation of the same number.

3 34

Number of rules can be configured, configure the number as shown above containing2 years, and2 months,4 -bit number.
In the following example, the rule number is in the form of:06030001.
Provide regular table manipulation tools such as in Figure3-32 and 3-33

3 35

Corresponding implications on: save, print, Print Setup, preview, copy, cut, paste, merge cells, split cells, insert,
delete, append, insert rows, delete rows, append rows, insert pictures, delete pictures, picture properties, table
properties, set variables and operational parameters;

3 36

Corresponding implications on: sets the cell font, cell size, cell border style, cell border type, text-align, center
text vertically, text alignment, text is left-aligned, text horizontally, the text right-aligned, boldface, underline,
text wrapping, print template is opened as read-only;

3.5.1 Notes

Print ticket template settings are saved inProject/OPN/czpModal.vts file, modify this information, you need to sync
to other computers.

3.6 Additional tools

3 37

Five settings:

3 38

You can set whether the operation, set the traffic summons information, including the string number, baud rate, and
so on. Of which:
" Automatic invoice skipping device does not exist ": using the universal template for an interval automatically when
invoicing, type of equipment for this interval is not automatically skip to ignore, rather than invoicing failed;
" Allow duplicate operations ": subpoena enforcement process, the last step of the action project, you can repeat the
operation, but to repeat the last State properly, in order to proceed.

Export rule file:

Export rules to all devices csc2100_home\AllReluer.txt File.

Generate to create key initialization file:

Generate to create key needed 3 An initialization file, including KTNDAT.FIL , Loctab.FIL , TYPTAB.FIL And put it on csc2100_home
Directory.
Typical text import:

As most of the power has some of the typical ticket system provides "The typical text import
" function. Requires the original
save the typical ticket into "*.txt" text file a ticket on a file name is the file name, content is the content of the file. All
"*.txt" in a typical text file in the same directory. Click on the " import typical text
"will pop up the following dialog box,
select the directory, click on the " Open ", the system automatically adds this directory of all the "txt" files thought to be
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 93/126
1/10/2017 <br>
select the directory, click on the " Open ", the system automatically adds this directory of all the "txt" files thought to be
typical text file template automatically imported to the system.

3 39

System auto-import template, the default is set to" Line spacing " , "110kV" " transmission " of the template, you
need to manually modify template properties. All templates in the template defaults to " other " types of operations, for
once, the second operation of the device requires manual modifications.
Network templates:

If you modify a template, saving five protection information, and click " Network synchronization template", information about
the native (including the template content file, print the template file, every template file) synchronized to other computers.
Note: synchronization, the template content file, print the template file, every template file and sync to other computers, so do not
edit this information to multiple computers at the same time. If you edit, you would have to manually sync, error-prone.
Import NTL format template file:

Tickets for all templates, template properties in the real-time library, template content ntl File (when you are finished editing,
synchronization is required on other computers). For other project templates can be NTL imported into this project, but a secondary
device in information cannot be imported. Or having abnormal situations, such as when the system library is missing template file,
you can use the NTL file recovery.

3.7 Editing after save

After you make the edit, please save it!!
Among them, the saved interface as shown below. " Every template " after editing, click on the " Save every template
" to hold; " templates ", and" interval information "and the" additional information " after editing Click on the " Save
five protection information " to hold; " print ticket template ", click on the " Save a print ticket template " to save.
Save information in " saving tips " tips.

3 40

Note: " Five anti-library information " If fails, go to the start menu of the system in the " System Administration " , " data backup
" and click " Save to business ", to all the real-time data (including five protection information) to your business library.
If you modify a template, and click " Network synchronization template ", you will modify the template content to sync to other
computers.

4 System capacity description

Five preventions system of the data capacity that is defined in the library definition file in real time and can be modified
according to user needs. Current default volume parameters of the system are:
Default capacity real-time database table size:
Table 4 1

200

Interval
information
Primary equipment 300
operation

Secondary 300
equipment
operation

A device type 500

Secondary 500
equipment subtype

Associated 500
equipment
operation

Secondary device 500

operation

Primary equipment 1000

Secondary 1000
equipment

Ticket number 400

templates
Lock table 1000

Current number of 800

tickets in the
ticket

Condition 200
definitions

Associated lock 500

In the template and the current," operation type " length of 255 characters (a character for 2 characters);

Due to create lock restriction, maximum one ticket only 240 operating incoming locks (other actions and secondary actions do not
pass locks);
Five preventions system, all the maximum name length is 31 characters (unless otherwise noted);

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 94/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Template name length is 63 characters;

The current maximum name length is 127 characters;

Regular character length is 255 characters;

5 The initialization of a computer key

Maintenance operation of the library, has developed a lock code for each device, curing equipment only in a computer
key number and the corresponding lock code key can receive operation orders transmitted sequence of operations.

5.1 Form the key initialization file

Key initialization files included4 -:LOCTAB.FIL,KTNDAT.FIL,TYPTAB.FIL,Bastx0.FIL. Interface can be used to provide
the " generate to create key initialization file
" before the tool automatically generates 3 files. 4 file Bastx0.FIL
need to manually edit the internal name of the power supply. Among them, theKTNDAT.FIL file on keys in terms of
configuration, the system is based on the config directory under the wfserver.ini file in the " create a lock setting "
write configuration.

5.2LOCTAB.FIL file
Locking a file, all the files stored in the substation install five locking devices number and its corresponding lock
codes, as well as the type of lock is installed. Description of the device number and the lock code must be and switching
the information described in this site.
File format: device number: Lock code , lock code attributes [, control properties ]!
Locking properties define how the device locking, and generally include the following:
Monitor equipment j
General Electric lock Q
Check electric lock y
Air lock ' empty '
Fixed lock / padlock n
Test lock z( detected through the auxiliary contacts)
Localization lock w( check the lock code correctly that is, skip this step)
Without locking device s( not latching device, skip the prompt, and then press power switch)
Description in the file such as:
121 : 0114,Q!
1211 : 032f,N!
1212 : 0332,N!
1214 : 0334,N!
121B0 : 0336,N!
121C0 : 0338,N!
12140 : 033a,N!

5.3KTNDAT.FIL file
Describes the device in substation of the dual number.
File formats: device number: Double number of equipment !
Device number must beTYPTAB.FIL are defined, equipment double numbering according to the user request, double number
for each device on the key displays up to 20 characters. Total length of the file is not recommended more than 16K; files
also have a relatively fixed-customization operations at the end of term descriptions, prompt for each type of equipment
terms of customization:
KG0: Cut*!
KG1: Close*!
DZ0: Open*!
DZ1: Close*!
DX0: Demolition*!
DX1: Hook*!
WM0: Open*!
WM1: Lock*!
BY0: Remove*!
BY1: On the given*!
DD0: Open*!
DD1: Close*!
DK0: Cancel*!
DK1: Prepare*!
GS: * Pulled to the test location by location!
SG: * Pushed into working position by test location!
GJ: * Pull to the repair location by location!
JG: * Maintenance position push to position!
JS: * Maintenance position to be pushed to testing locations!
SJ: * Test pull to the repair location!
* Double number of representatives corresponding equipment.
Description in the file such as:
121 : 110KV Changchun lines 121 Switch!
1211 : 110KV Changchun lines 1211 Knife switch!
1212 : 110KV Changchun lines 1212 Knife switch!
1214 : 110KV Changchun lines 1214 Knife switch!
121B0 : 110KV Changchun lines 121B0 Grounding!
121C0 : 110KV Changchun lines 121C0 Grounding!
12140 : 110KV Changchun lines 12140 Grounding!

5.4TYPTAB.FIL file
Device type description.
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 95/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Device type description.
File formats: device number: Device type !
Device number for no longer than 8 characters (a combination of numbers, letters, and so on);
Device types are mainly the following:
Table 5 1

Switch KG
Knife switch DZ
Knife DD
Ground wire DX
The Web portal WM
Tri-State equipment ST (Such as car
device)
Inspection equipment YD
Ground equipment DK
Standby equipment BY
Description in the file such as:
121 : KG!
1211 : DZ!
1212 : DZ!
1214 : DZ!
121B0 : DD!
121C0 : DD!
12140 : DD!

5.5 Overwrite the Bastx0.FIL file

Computer key standby to display the information.

Template file is as follows:
Step : separate@
Step : close@
Step : separate ( )@
Step : close ( )@
Step : line check@
Step : line check@
Beijing Quartet@
Research and Development Center@
Testing group@
Current encoding value is:@
Enter the address State@
Procedure error!@
Load knives!@
Charged up the ground wire!@
Ground switch!@
Is not consistent!@
Check@
Series@
Codes@
----- @
Please revert to the hand wheel!@
The front six rows blank, but there must be neat;
DiqiBAJIU (the bold blue underlined words) key after booting the realistic content, modify according to actual needs;

5.6 Data and initialize the key

Data file is ready, you need to use mkinit.exe Program and data files in an initialization key. Process, run the mkinit program are as
follows:

5 1

Click on the tool bar And the buttons for data processing, if the files have problems, according to the instructions to check

and modify the file. When processing is complete click on the button to enter the initialization interface, as shown below:

5 2

Apart from the communication port select,, in accordance with the above interface option, and then click " Initialize keys " button
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 96/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Apart from the communication port select,, in accordance with the above interface option, and then click " Initialize keys " button
to initialize the keys work, time <8 Minutes (probably 3 40 Seconds). Key to power on the computer after the initialization is complete,
computer key after post power off, power on again to normal use.

6 Engineering configuration description

6.1 Create interval template
Look first at the interval template, is there a interval of templates that are available, if not, based on the current connection
forms, secondary equipment create a spacing template

6.2 Create interval

Because the five intervals requires strict and monitored across the middle is not exactly the same, so the need to create space here.
Creates a new interval, modify the interval name, and corresponding to the five intervals, fill in the main switch;
According to the created interval interval template, shown in the instruction manual;
According to user requirements, modifying equipment rules of logic in the interval, changes in equipment;
Interval interval can be used copy of the same type, shown in the instruction manual;

6.3 Configuration lock

According to the user request, after installing the lock, giving each number lock and enter the system;

6.4 Configuration terminology

According to user requirements, revised, secondary equipment operation term;

6.5 Configuring templates

If user can provide typical documents, convert documents into multiple txt File, import systems using the tools provided by the
system. In the import system, then more specific content modification " devices " and the " action type ".
For the same voltage level of line spacing, suggested doing a non-fixed template, which greatly reduced quantities;

7 Five profile description

Five configuration information is saved in the file config/wfserver.ini In the. Some information can be configured on the interface.
Other information generally do not change, such as:
[Five protection settings]
Automatically create formulas =0
Preview automatically every time seconds =2
Initialize the ticket information =1
[Create a lock set]
.
Among them, the " Initialization message " 1 Shi, wfserver Process starts automatically when the current empty, is not empty.

8 Engineering frequently asked questions FAQ

8.1 Virtual remote instructions

Equipped with the main locking device, key action, key to return the device status, but when the equipment corresponds to the remote
signal is solid when remote signal does not modify the remote monitor, if this 2 Does not correspond to a State, then tip in the
background. If the device away, taking remote that corresponds to the letter, that this remote control could not be collected, according
to the key return State direct modification of the corresponding remote signal in the monitor State.

8.2 Web portal and ground how to create

Web portal and ground does not need the corresponding remote signaling, operating ticket automatic capture five data graphics in the
Web portal and ground state. Web portal and the ground wire for the keys back, and does not correspond to, and can be set in the
graphics state;
Entity types by adding five new devices, these entities correspond to five-nets in doors and ground.

8.3 Several operating mechanism is installed a device lock, how to deal with
Sometimes, a device has several operators (such as electrical box, manual operating mechanism, and so on), some substations in these
lock operating mechanism is installed on, then, is a device corresponds to more than one lock condition. This will lock into the same
lock, the device this locking carabiner and lock properties is the electric lock. When it comes to operating manual operating mechanism
on the padlock, electric locks with a key-mechanical lock capability, operation after conversion. (When a user asked to open the
electric lock and open the manual operation mechanism of mechanical locks, need to set key mode to " continuous " lock.

8.4 When multiple devices (such as device , device b) consists of a mechanical lock (padlock) locked, how to deal

with
Because these are a lock with mechanical equipment may operate, or operate the equipment A Or operate the equipment B , And equipment
requirements, and locked one, locked, cannot be repeated. You cannot configure this lock is a lock on one of these devices, only new
hand or network equipment, corresponding to the lock, other devices, establish a virtual lock, lock locked property is false. Such as
locks, 0x111, this interval is a device in the following table:
Table 8 1

Device type Lock number Lock

property
F1 The Web 10kV The 0x111 Mechanical
portal Web portal lock

F1 Virtual Virtual lock

Equipment A lock

F1 Virtual Virtual lock

Equipment B lock

Note: better prepared all of the devices in the system, lock, and no duplicate lock after breaking lock (because creating 26 Lock was
a one-off, break a lock, it cannot be changed).

8.5 Phenomenon: five prevention device is configured, five-prevention operation in graphics but do not have this
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 97/126
1/10/2017 <br>
8.5 Phenomenon: five prevention device is configured, five-prevention operation in graphics but do not have this
device
Discovered this phenomenon in order by:
1 . Switch, switch the device on when you configure remote control, and can only configure 2 remote, one circuit breaker remote signal
(or switch remote signal), a universal remote.
2 . Five edit checks in the State of this five-prevention device corresponding to the switch, remote configuration and monitoring
consistent.

Nineth part IEC61850 Configuration tool

Directory

1SCLINTRODUCTION
1.1OVERVIEW

1.2XMLLANGUAGE

1.3SCLLANGUAGE

2DOCUMENT TYPES AND DOCUMENT PROCESSES INTRODUCTION

2.1FILE TYPE

2.2DOCUMENT WORKFLOW

2.3CONFIGURATION TOOLS AND FEATURES

3GUIDELINES FOR USING CONFIGURATION TOOLS

3.1NEW CONSTRUCTION

3.2SCDCONFIGURATION

3.3GENERATIONSSDCONFIGURATION

3.4GENERATECIDCONFIGURATION

3.5COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.6FOUR REMOTE DECOMPOSITION

3.7XMLEDITING FEATURES

3.8CONFIGURATION TOOLS USING THE PROCESS

1SCL Introduction
1.1 Overview
IEC61850 Communication networks and systems in substations structures standard series of part VI: substations IED Communication
configuration description language specification used to configure substation IED Description of the language -The substation
configuration description language ( SubstationConfigurationdescriptionLanguage )

SCL IED Application configuration descriptions to communications and systems management tools can also be in a compatible manner the
system configuration Description returns IED The configuration tool. Configuration data can be supplied by different manufacturers are
achieving IED Configuration tool and exchanged between the system configuration tool.

SCL Language is based on Extensible Markup Language XML1.0 Version. Configuration tools described in this article, XML related
parts are built on XML1.0 basis.

1.2XML language
XML ( eXtensibleMarkupLanguage ), Extensible markup language, is the slogan a reset statement.

" Labeling "( Markup ) Is the precise definition of the term: a method for encoding the data information of the data itself. Markup
language is a language to encode data.
" Labeling " defining abstract, but in everyday life, people unconsciously frequently use " labeling " concept. For example, use a
yellow highlighter to highlight certain sentences from textbooks, or underline the sentences. By highlighting these content effectively
will they " labeling ", says the text is important. Information on these texts, the fact that these texts are important, so is coded;
yellow fluorescent handwriting or underscore is the slogan.
At present, the development of the Internet has matured, and is widely used in Web The Hypertext Markup Language HTML ( HyperText
MarkupLanguage ) Belongs to the family of markup languages. Generally speaking,HTMLwas a language used to add tags to the text. HTML
provides a series of labels, each label shows that a certain amount of display formats. Markup file (which contains both a plain text

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 98/126
1/10/2017 <br>
provides a series of labels, each label shows that a certain amount of display formats. Markup file (which contains both a plain text
and on the label for a text display format for the file) consists of a HTML processing tool, such as a browser, for reading, and then
be displayed according to the marking rules.
XML ( eXtensibleMarkupLanguage ) Language markup language, and is extensible ( eXtensible ) Reset the banner. XML like HTML provides
a set of defined labels in advance, but to provide a standard. Use standard, based on actual needs, define your own new markup language,
and to define the markup language provides its unique set of tags (attributes). Accurate to say,XML is a meta-markup language, which
allows according to its own rules, developed a variety of home sign.
In General, the XML Series consists of three parts, XSD File, XML Files, and stylesheets.

XSD File: define what is a valid label, which further defines the structure of the markup language;

XML File: XSD File tags to the data that is defined in markup documents;

Style file: XML Using the attached style sheet to the application, such as a browser, provides instructions on how to display data.

1.3SCL language
IEC618506 Part description communications related IED Configuration configuration parameters, communication systems, switching
interval (functional) structures and relationship between file formats. Standards or regulations used SCL product; nor restrict computer
system within the overall implementation and interface, also does not provide download to the various producers of IED configuration data
format.
Above the SCL Describes the definition of abstract, combining XML Definition and characteristic analysis of language SCL Language.

XML Is a meta-markup language, and SCL Language is based on the XML Language. Equivalent to the SCL language based on XML standard
rules for providing, according to the needs of the substation automation system, here the IEC61850 standard defines specific reset sign
statements. SCL language is XML language specific application in the substation automation system.

Described earlier XML A three-part series XSD Files, XML File, and style files. SCL language based on XML language, but
generally consists of two parts. Substation project, regardless of client/server which side do not use the browser to read XML files, so you
don't have style files.
First, XSD File: mark the task complete declarations, IEC618506 Section defines a total SCL.xsd SCL_Substation.xsd SCL_IED.xsd
SCL_Communication.xsd SCL_DataTypeTemplates.xsd SCL_BaseSimpleTypes.xsd SCL_BaseTypes.xsd SCL_Enums.xsd Eight XSD Defined in
substation automation system may use all tags and their attributes.
SCL Language XSD Document is based on IEC61850 The normative definition of, the model is IEC618507 Part of the substation and
transmission line equipment data models, that is, SCL General substation a series of labels is defined based on actual situation of
abstraction.
IEC618506 Is given in the standard SCL Language XSD Detailed definition of the file, that is, this standard specifies XSD Describes
the valid tags and attributes. All devices that support this standard uses the same XSD files.
Second, the XML File: XSD File defines the labels, complete file (data object) labeling task.

IEC618506 Define substation project-specific XML File suffix SCD SSD ICD CID (See 1.2.1 Section).

These are strictly defined by the eight XSD File binding, is strictly controlled by the XML1.0 Standard syntax constraints. Speaking
both in terms of physical structure, was speaking from the logical structure,XML files must conform to the specifications, in order to
be correctly interpreted.

2 Document types and document processes introduction

2.1 File type
IEC61850 More files involved in the configuration tool, the following classification describes various file.

A)IEC618506 standard file

SSD File: System documentation, SCL Language format suffix .SSD, each project a file describing the substation system topology;

ICD File: IED Profile SCL Language format suffix .ICD, each IED the file that describes device configuration;

SCD File: substation configuration description file, SCL Language format suffix .SCD, each project a the file, used to describe the
configuration of substations;
CID File: once configured IED Description of the file, SCL Language format suffix .CID, each IED the file describes the the configured
device function.
B) communication subsystem configuration file

osicfg.xml : osi Profile descriptor file, each project a the file.

system_cfg.ini : System configuration files, each project a the file, used to describe the overall communication of total station
configuration.
server_cfg_***.ini : server Configuration file, each server A file that is used to describe server Communication configuration.

C) into the description file

DID : DIDescription , Open into the description file, XML Format suffix .DID, every CSI200E installation of a file that describes the
device into, which belongs to the private files of the Quartet, not IEC61850 defined series.

D) remote file

DevTab.txt : Total-station device list file

AnalogTab.txt : Remote files

DigitTab.txt : Remote files

ProtEventTab.txt : Site-wide file protection event

AlarmTab.txt : Site-wide alarm files

ControlTab.txt : Remote files

2.2 Document workflow

During the configuration process, document processes are as follows:
With SSD configuration features SSD files;
Read into the description file for each device model ICD file;
By SCD configuration capabilities, according to SSD file information and ICD file information, generate SCD files;
Through CID to generate menus, based on SCD file information, generate each unit of CID file;
CID file for use by the device;
CSI200E management tool reads the CID file generation DID file;
Through a communications subsystem configuration, read the SCD file information, generated a series of communication subsystem
configuration files;
By splitting four remote functions, read the SCD file information and all DID file information, build four remote files;
For use by the monitoring and remote configuration tool;

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 99/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 1

2.3 Configuration tools and features

IEC61850 Configuration tool from the system configuration tool, the configuration tool is composed of two parts.

ICD File description IED Capacity, including IED Contains the logical devices, logical nodes, data collection, report control blocks,
and so on.
The system configuration tool's main function is to first import ICD File, secondly, substation system needs to IED Represents a
topology configured device in substation and then ICD File described in the logical device and logical node, instantiated in the
substation automation system (including the identification of specific logical index of the node name); and then, depending on the
configuration system of substation information, generate SSD Files (system files) and SCD File (system configuration file), and then,
under SCD File generated for each IED Examples for CID File (that is, configured IED Profile); and, finally, according to the needs of the
substation automation system, generate application-oriented special configuration files (including the profiles of communication
subsystem decomposition and four remote files).
Configuration tool's main function is based on the output of the system configuration tool (mainly remote decomposition files) and
database structure is automatically generated in real time, and automatically generate IEC61850 Index information and mapping of database
indexing information in real time.

3 Guidelines for using configuration tools

3.1 New construction
3.1.1 The newly built transformer substation

Click Projects new construction

3 1 3 2

3 3

Click Keep, because it is the first time you need to enter the file name and save path.

3 4

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 100/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 5

File has been saved, now open XML Tree window and XML The text window.

3 6

3 7

At this point we have created a substation " Empty shell ", which is a legal document, but it is not a valid file (that is,
unauthenticated).

3.1.2 Adds a voltage level

Let the substation add a " Voltage " node ( VoltageLevel ), See figure below.

3 8 3 9

3.1.3 Add interval

Under the new voltage level increases " Interval "( Bay ),

3 10 3 11

3.1.4 Add a main transformer

Next add a transformer ( PowerTransformer ), The note is added in a substation is not under voltage.

3 12 3 13

You must add at least one winding of the main transformer, by the number of main transformer of transformer windings are several
rolls of the same decision.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 101/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 14

3.1.5 Add a connection device

Now we are in 220kV Under voltage level to add a " 1# Main transformer high-voltage side " Intervals, and to add the interval a
connection device ( ConductingEquipment ): 25A Switch.

3 15 3 16

Note Add a switch for you already added two terminals, terminal name: switch + " 1 (Or 2 ) " Corresponding to the two terminals of the
switch.

3 17

Now suppose you have a wiring diagram:

3 18

So you want to add a switch 25A1 25A2 25A3 We made a provision: each two-terminal device (or to the left) terminal for below
the Terminal (or the right) Terminal II Terminal. According to the above, we can draw:25A1 25A32, and25A2 25A11, and 25A
2 25A21, and25A12 I mother,25A22 II Mother,25A31 1# main transformer high-voltage side. " Terminal:25A3-2" click
the right key on " ready to connect ", and then on the 25A1 click the right key on " connection ", as shown below:

3 19 3 20

When a connection point is automatically generated ( ConnectivityNode ) C25A1

3 21

Among them, the Connection name =c+ connection terminals of the names ( but not ready to connect terminals of the names ), the path
name =Substation +/+voltage +/+interval +/+connection names.

Note:
If you are connected to the two terminals are not linked to any connection points to establish a connection, it automatically
creates a new connection point, the name of the connection point and path names follow the above principles;
If you have a Terminal and connection terminals connection points A Association (a connection point can be any number of associated
terminals) not relevant to another, there is no associated terminals will be connected A Associate, without establishing a new connection
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 102/126
1/10/2017 <br>
terminals) not relevant to another, there is no associated terminals will be connected A Associate, without establishing a new connection
point;
" Ready to connect terminals " have connection points A Associations, " Connection terminal " have connection points B Associations,
" Ready to connect terminals " disconnect from a connection point A The connection point associated B Associate, also does not establish
a new connection point (that is, connection point is preferred);
If the connection is a connection point A , Is the terminal of the other party, regardless of whether the terminals and other
associated connection point, disconnects the Association (if any), and connection points A To establish a connection, also new connection
point.

3.1.6 To add a connection point

In addition to the above refers to automatically establish a connection point ( ConnectivityNode ), We can also manually establish a
connection point. Sometimes we have to add it manually, such as connection to the bus.
In order to connect to the bus, we have set up two buses every: 220kVI The mother and 220kVII Mother. 220kVI establishing a connection
point in the interval C25A12, 220kVII establishes a connection point in the interval C25A22, said it would switch 25A2 second terminals
25A22 connections. (Bus intervals theoretically need only establish a connection point, but in order to more clearly best for each
connection established a connection, and preferably with a certain connection of meaning. If you must set up a connection, the
connection point names do not contain any connection terminals of the names, or will affect the intervals referred to later copy)

3 22 3 23

Connection points C25A12 And terminals 25A12 Connections, C25A22 And terminals 25A22 Connection:

3 24

3.1.7 Connection of main transformer

Done so much work we verify, click Unfortunately you will find a bunch of wrong, at least two of them:

[Error] File :220kVXXXStation.scd :8 :173 Error message :cvcpatternvalid:Value''isnotfacetvalidwithrespecttopattern'.+/.+/.+/.+'fortype'tRef'.

[Error] File :220kVXXXStation.scd :28 :186 Error message :cvcpatternvalid:Value''isnotfacetvalidwithrespecttopattern'.+/.+/.+/.+'fortype'tRef'.

Now look at part 8 Rows and 28 Row is what elements (rows and columns are for example only, not necessarily 8 28 ) You will find all
Terminal (Terminal). Check IEC61850 provisions found Terminal element of an attribute " path connection point (connectivityNode) " Should meet
the 'tRef' Type, its value should be '.+/.+/.+/.+' Format. Remember 2.1.1.5 : provisions relating to path name? (Pathname =substation +/+voltage
+/+interval +/+connection names. Is this format.

Now recall that we added 1# Also added a winding of the main transformer T1H It has a Terminal is not connected, and knife gate
25A3 first Terminal 25A31 has no connection, think back to our hypothetical wiring diagrams in front, just these two terminals should be
connected. Are connected, and then verify, the error above is gone (there may be other errors is not validated).
Connection status:

3 25

3 26

3.1.8 Add device

Now check and found two very strange error:

[Error] File :220kVXXXStation.scd :43 :26 Error message : cvccomplextype.2.4.b:Thecontentofelement'Communication'isnot
complete.Oneof'{WC[##other:"http://www.iec.ch/61850/2003/SCL"],"http://www.iec.ch/61850/2003/SCL":Text,
"http://www.iec.ch/61850/2003/SCL":Private,"http://www.iec.ch/61850/2003/SCL":SubNetwork}'isexpected.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 103/126
1/10/2017 <br>
[Error] File :220kVXXXStation.scd :44 :30 Error message :cvccomplextype.2.4.b:Thecontentofelement'DataTypeTemplates'isnot
complete.Oneof'{"http://www.iec.ch/61850/2003/SCL":LNodeType}'isexpected.
Similarly, open text 43 44 What are the elements. Found to be 'Communication' and 'DataTypeTemplates'(the template node communications
and data types). Below them have no elements, function and effect on these two nodes that will be explained below. Now add a device.

3 27 3 28

3 29

Now verify if above steps right, and just added ICD File itself is no problem, should be verified.

We'll see just errors that two nodes 'Communication' 'DataTypeTemplates'

3 30

Already have a lot of content, which " Subnet " just report an error SubNetwork LNodeType just wrong place.

3.1.9 Copy interval

When after an interval configured for similar copy interval methods can be taken to speed up configuration of the interval speed.
First, select an interval, and replication.

3 31 3 32

3 33

Tool named the original interval T1H Where transposition T2H , Number (switch) into 25B

3 34 3 35

Note that because logical node is unique to each interval and interval copy does not copy the logical nodes.

3.2SCD configuration
3.2.1 What is the SCD

SCD File is a substation configuration description file, follow the SCL Language format suffix .SCD, each project has a file, used
to describe the configuration of substation equipment and communication. Including Substation,Communication,IED and DataTypeTemplates into
four parts.

3.2.2 SCD

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 104/126
1/10/2017 <br>
In accordance with the 2.1.1 Tells about the new project, the resulting file is actually scd File. Will not go into here.

3.3 Generation SSD configuration

3.3.1 What is SSD

SSD File is used to describe file system, follow the SCL Language format suffix .SSD, each project can have a file describing the
substation system topology. Generally have to include Substation, or Communication,IED and DataTypeTemplates parts.

3.3.2 Generation SSD

In the configuration tool based on scd Automatically generated file ssd File, and then ssd File will be saved under the specified path.

3 36 3 37

3.4 Generate CID configuration

3.4.1 What is a CID

CID File is used to describe the configuration file, follow the SCL Language format suffix .CID, each device has a file in each
project. Generally have to include Substation,Communication,IED and DataTypeTemplates into four parts.

3.4.2 Generate CID

scd File has been modified, you need to send to the device the device information, you need to generate for each appliance ( IED ) icd
File. Methods are as follows:

3 38 3 39

Configuration tools in the specified path is all IED Corresponds to the node cid File.

3.5 Communication subsystem configuration

In order to be scd File for communication of information to the communication process, you need to generate communication subsystem
configuration file. Steps are as follows:

3 40 3 41

3 42

3.6 Four remote decomposition

1. function overview

Module functions are remote decomposition, IEC61850 Standard specification for XML File, configuration information for the object-
oriented decomposition, generated four remote points of traditional point-oriented and to distinguish between protected and protection
alarms, were made to DevTab.txt AnalogTab.txt ControlTab.txt DigitTab.txt ProtEventTab.txt AlarmTab.txt File, for the monitoring and
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 105/126
1/10/2017 <br>
alarms, were made to DevTab.txt AnalogTab.txt ControlTab.txt DigitTab.txt ProtEventTab.txt AlarmTab.txt File, for the monitoring and
telecontrol applications.
2. four remote premise decomposition

Performed on the Tools menu Building communication subsystem configuration file submenu, build four remote file submenu is activated.

3. remote functions their use

A. Click the Tools menu, build four remote file submenu, four remote decomposition.

3 43

B. Total-station device DID file stored in the same directory

C. Select DID file storage directory.

D. Specify remote decomposition results (remote files) storage directory, the default DID the directory where the file resides

3 44 3 45

E. Output remote files, store files to a specified directory

4. error messages

Error messages fall into two categories: warnings and errors.

Warning: SCD File information is not comprehensive and may result in incorrect remote decomposition results.

Error: SCD File missing information may result in decomposition of remote results of missing part of the point.

3.7XML editing features

2.1.1 We have introduced a new process of engineering, will complement this section describes some of the features menu.

3.7.1 Open the project

Hence the name think Italy, open an existing project file ( .scd File). Can also be used to open a meet the XML format of the XML
file. Because the configuration tools are special tools used in project, when you open a file without verifying documents provided shall
be the substation (Sustation) node, the inquiry dialog box will pop up:

If you click on a " Be " button will set you up to substation node, otherwise it will not file any changes, just to XML Tree form.

3.7.2 Save and save as

Save the file name to save the file that is currently open, if the Save button is grayed out, it means that the file has been saved.
If it is a new file, save for the first time you will be prompted to enter the path and file name to save. If the file name is not
entered in .SCD or .SSD or .ICD as a suffix and will force plus .SCD suffix.
Save as to enter the path and file name to save the file, and the current file to the input file. If the file name is not entered in .
SCD or .SSD or .ICD as a suffix and will force plus .SCD suffix.

3.7.3 Copy and paste

Replication node copies the selected node.

Shear node copy and delete the selected node.
Paste as sibling below will paste the copied node to the selected node, the two nodes of the same level.
Paste as child nodes will paste the copied node as child nodes of the selected node, which is a parent-child node. If the parent node
already exists in the paste node node of the same type, the paste after the last node of the same type, or paste after the last child
node of a parent node.

3.7.4 Adding and deleting

Add sibling adds a sibling nodes at the same level with the selected node.
Increased child Add a child node to the selected node.
Add properties for the selected node to add a property.
Delete node deletes the selected node.
Deleted property removes the selected attribute.
Note This section may cause improper operation of the file validation does not pass.

3.7.5 Rename

Renaming a node Rename the selected node.

Renaming attributes renaming the selected property.
Note This section may cause improper operation of the file validation does not pass.

3.7.6 Validation

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 106/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Verify that ... Open the file and verify that the open.
Verify that the current file Verify that the file is currently open.

3.7.7 View

View substation substation node and its child nodes appear.

View the device list displays a list of device node and its child nodes. Note the device list node does not exist, is increased in
order to adapt to the habits of a virtual node. In the XML tree and is not found in the text of the node.
View the address display the address node and its child nodes.
View the data type templates display the data types node and its child nodes.
View the XML tree will be fully XML file node in the sequence shows the structure of the whole tree.
View the XML text to display XML file text.

3.7.8 Window

Window horizontally will open with all the child forms are arranged horizontally.
Windows are arranged vertically will open with all child forms vertically aligned.

3.8 Configuration tools using the process

3 46

During configuration, configure the tool using the following process:

1. a new project, as described in the previous section;

2. generate SCD to configure, build, SSD configuration, generate CID configuration, generates more than three types of configuration
files in any order;
3. generate CID configuration, use CSI200E management tool (this tool is not part of the scope of this specification, as described in
the CSI200E device management software user manual);
4. generate SCD configuration, communication subsystem configuration;

5. the communications subsystem configuration, and CSI200E after the administration tools, remote decomposition;

6. remote after decomposition, configuration tools, and remote configuration tool.

4 Naming rules
On the basic requirement for the device name:
Element IED , name Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) A Western character;

3 ) Only.

4 ) Should try to contain device information

5 ) Company abbreviation _ Appliance models

For example: IEDname= " SF_CSC161A1 "

Element IED , desc Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) May include Chinese characters.

3 ) According to the current development needs, call four remote decomposition IED , desc The value of recommended intervals + device
names (Chinese name)
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 107/126
1/10/2017 <br>
names (Chinese name)
4 ) Four remote decomposition desc Only total station

For example: IEDdesc= " Control transformer high-voltage side the Quartet CSI200E "

Element VoltageLevel , name Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) A Western character;
3 ) Only.

4 ) Should try to contain the voltage itself information

For example: VoltageLevelname= " 220kV "

Element PowerTransformer , name Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) A Western character;

3 ) Only.

4 ) Transformer interval: T + Number of main transformer

Table 4 1

Serial Name Physical meaning

number of
1 T1 1# Main
transformer
2 T2 2# Main
transformer
3 T3 3# Main
transformer
Element PowerTransformer , desc Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) May include Chinese characters.

3 ) According to the current development needs, call four remote decomposition PowerTransformer , desc The value of name meaning clear.

4 ) Four remote decomposition desc Only total station

5 ) See name In the table " Physical implication "

Element Bay , name Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) A Western character;
3 ) Only.

4 ) Transformer interval: T + Main number + H/M/L

Table 4 2

Serial Name Physical meaning

number of
4 T1H 1# Main
transformer high-
voltage side
5 T2M 2# Mid-voltage
side of main
transformer
6 T3L 3# Low voltage
side of main
transformer

Line spacing: L + Line name phonetic ( First letter)

Bus: every B + Voltage + bus number

Table 4 3

Serial Name Physical meaning

number of

1 B220kV1 220kV Bus I

2 B110kV2 110kV Bus II

Element Bay , desc Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) May include Chinese characters.

3 ) According to the current development needs, call four remote decomposition Bay , desc The value of name meaning clear.

4 ) Four remote decomposition desc Only total station

5 ) See name In the table " Physical implication "

For example: Baydesc= " 1# Main transformer high-voltage side "

Element ConductingEquipment , name Property

1 ) Does not include carriage return, newline;

2 ) A Western character;

3 ) Only.

4 ) Containing information of the device itself as much as possible

5 ) Device type + number: device type see IEC61850 - 6 , Table5 Equipment type code
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 108/126
1/10/2017 <br>
5 ) Device type + number: device type see IEC61850 - 6 , Table5 Equipment type code

For example: ConductingEquipmentname= " CBR201 "

Other element names are not mentioned, who is not a desc Attribute must not contain characters.

5 Configuration examples
5.1 The device list file
File name: DevTab.txt

#This document places all devices of all interval of substation // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number ,Server Number, device name , Interval name , Belongs to the voltage level // , And voltage levels to which the
partition belongs interval, interval voltage of transformer
0,0, Zhang BA I , Zhang BA line I,110kV

5.2 File protection event list

File name: ProtEventTab.txt

#This file place the substation all intervals of all protection event // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number , Appliance name ,Server , Physical quantity , Characteristic words ,reference1,reference2, Data type // , For breaks

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Phase to phase distance I The outlet , Protection event ,Prot,PDIS1$ST$Op,struct_ACT_ST_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Phase to phase distance II The outlet , Protection event ,Prot,PDIS2$ST$Op,struct_ACT_ST_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Phase to phase distance III The outlet , Protection event ,Prot,PDIS3$ST$Op,struct_ACT_ST_TYPEID

5.3 Remote control list file

File name: ControlTab.txt

#This file place the substation all intervals of all the remote control point // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number , Appliance name ,Server , Physical quantity , Characteristic words ,reference1,reference2, Data type // , For breaks

0, Zhang BA I ,0,101 Switch , Circuit breaker ,Ctrol,Q0CSWI1$CO$Pos,BOOLEAN_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0,1011 Knife switch , Knife switch ,Ctrol,Q1CSWI1$CO$Pos,BOOLEAN_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0,1012 Knife switch , Knife switch ,Ctrol,Q2CSWI1$CO$Pos,BOOLEAN_TYPEID

5.4 Telemetry points list file
#This document places all intervals of all the remote control in substation // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number , Appliance name ,Server , Physical quantity , Characteristic words ,reference1,reference2, Data type , Index , Scaling
factor , Offset , // "," To break

0, Zhang BA I ,0,MMXU1P, active , MEAS,MMXU1$MX$TotW$mag$f,FLOAT_TYPEID,0,null,null,null

0, Zhang BA I , 0,MMXU1Q, reactive , MEAS,MMXU1$MX$TotVAr$mag$f,FLOAT_TYPEID,0,null,null,null

0, Zhang BA I , 0,MMXU1COS1, power factor , MEAS,MMXU1$MX$TotPF$mag$f,FLOAT_TYPEID,0,null,null,null

0, Zhang BA I , 0, MMXU1P, Active , MEAS,MMXU1$MX$Hz$mag$f,FLOAT_TYPEID,0,null,null,null

5.5 List remote files

#This document places all intervals of all the remote signal in substation // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number , Appliance name ,Server , Physical quantity , Characteristic words ,reference1,reference2, Data type // , For breaks

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Into the 1, Universal remote ,Ctrol,Q0CSWI1$ST$Pos$stVal,ENUM2_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Into the 3, Universal remote ,Ctrol,Q1CSWI1$ST$Pos$stVal,ENUM2_TYPEID

0, Zhang BA I ,0, Into the 5, Universal remote ,Ctrol,Q2CSWI1$ST$Pos$stVal,ENUM2_TYPEID

5.6 Alarm list file

#This file place the substation all intervals of all protection alarms // # As a comment at the beginning

#Format: unit serial number , Appliance name ,Server , Physical quantity , Characteristic words ,reference1,reference2, Data type // , For breaks

(There is no actual alarm volume)

6 Communication subsystem configuration file

The profiles of communication subsystem consists of two parts: data and network profile configuration file.
Network configuration files XML File format, the network configuration file name: osicfg.xml Which need to be modified according to
the part LocalAddressList , Modified specifically according to the device address AR_Name For the corresponding device name RemoteAddress
NetAddr Elements. For example: device ZhangBa1_11 IP address is 192.168.10.21, then the modified RemoteAddressList for:
<RemoteAddressList>
<RemoteAddress>
<AR_Name>ZhangBa1_11</AR_Name>
<AP_Title>13999923</AP_Title>
<AE_Qualifier>23</AE_Qualifier>
<Psel>00000001</Psel>
<Ssel>0001</Ssel>
<Tsel>0001</Tsel>
<NetAddrType="IPADDR">192.168.10.21</NetAddr>
</RemoteAddress>
<RemoteAddress>
<AR_Name>ZhangbaLine1_11</AR_Name>
<AP_Title>13999923</AP_Title>

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 109/126
1/10/2017 <br>
<AP_Title>13999923</AP_Title>
<AE_Qualifier>23</AE_Qualifier>
<Psel>00000001</Psel>
<Ssel>0001</Ssel>
<Tsel>0001</Tsel>
<NetAddrType="IPADDR">192.168.10.22</NetAddr>
</RemoteAddress>
</RemoteAddressList>

Data configuration file, using a text file. Data profiles include system (system_cfg.ini) and the server files (server_cfg_***.ini, ***
indicates that the Server serial number from 000 Start, maximum 234) Specific file formats are as follows:

System files:
#System configuration information

#IED The number of # Number of servers # Number of subnets # Delay time ( x Seconds)

@End system configuration information

#Server configuration information

#IED # Server number # Address name # Subnet numbers

@End of the server configuration information

Server files
#Dataset definition
#IED Server, data set names domain name pathname variable types

@Data sets define the end

#Polling data set definition
#IED Server, data set names poll time

@Polling data sets define the end

#Control block defines
#IED Servers, network control block control block type control block header control blocks the path name Data set control blocks
property triggers set the total call time
@Control block defines the end

" # " Symbol indicates that the current line is a comment line.

" @ "The end is a symbol that represents the current row.

Introductions:
1. IED number representing the number of physical devices

2.the number of servers client Server mode, the server number, now correspond to the physical device and the server are one by one
of the Quartet.
3.the number of subnets that this system has several physical network segments, such as dual-network hot-standby system 2 a network
segment.
4. delay time indicates the network link with the wait time, such as network disconnection time required 100 seconds, then the delay
time to bypass the time is disconnected from the network, and can be set to 120 seconds.
5. IED , IED serial numbers from 0 Start, assigned by the configuration tool and applied in the entire system.

6.the server indicates that server's serial number from 0 Start, assigned by the configuration tool and applied in the entire system.

7. address names each osicfg.XML file name AR_Name, which is the name of a system-wide unique string

8.the subnet number represents a physical network segments, the sequence number, 0 Start, assigned by the configuration tool and
applied in the entire system.
9.the data set name represents the name of the DataSet.

10. domain names that reference "/" preceding section, can also be seen as a logical device name.

11. the path name reference "/" signed later, can also be seen as a logical node name + data object name + Data property name.

12. type indicates that the variables in the variable type of communication subsystem, there are the following types:

#defineNO_THIS_ONE_TYPEID1000// Without this type of

#defineBSTR6_TYPEID1001//6 Bit string

#defineBSTR8_TYPEID1002//8 Bit string

#defineBVSTR6_TYPEID1003//6 Bit string structure

#defineBVSTR8_TYPEID1004//8 Bit string structure

#defineBVSTR9_TYPEID1005//9 Bit string structure

#defineOSTR8_TYPEID1006//8 10 Binary number

#defineUTC_TIME_TYPEID1007//UTC Time scale

#defineBOOLEAN_TYPEID1008// Boolean

#defineBTIME6_TYPEID1009// Two 32 Structure of the integers

#defineINT8U_TYPEID1010//8 -Bit unsigned integral type

#defineINT16U_TYPEID1011//16 -Bit unsigned integral type

#defineINT32U_TYPEID1012//32 -Bit unsigned integral type

#defineINT8_TYPEID1013//8 -Bit signed integral type

#defineINT16_TYPEID1014//16 -Bit signed integral type

#defineINT32_TYPEID1015//32 -Bit signed integral type

#defineINT128_TYPEID1016//128 -Bit signed integral type

#defineFLOAT_TYPEID1017//32 -Bit floating point number

#defineFLOAT64_TYPEID1018//64 -Bit floating point number

#defineENUM2_TYPEID1019//2 Enumeration

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 110/126
1/10/2017 <br>
#defineENUM8_TYPEID1020//8 Enumeration

#defineENUM16_TYPEID1021//16 Enumeration

#defineVstring64_TYPEID1022//64 Character string

#defineVstring255_TYPEID1023//255 Character string

#defineUstring255_TYPEID1024//255 Characters UNICODE String

#defineVSTR32_TYPEID1025//32 Character string

#defineVSTR65_TYPEID1026//65 Character string

#definestruct_SPS_ST_TYPEID1100//CDC=SPSFC=ST
#definestruct_DPS_ST_TYPEID1101//CDC=DPSFC=ST
#definestruct_INS_ST_TYPEID1102//CDC=INSFC=ST

#definestruct_ACT_ST_TYPEID1103//CDC=ACTFC=ST Mainly used for protection

#definestruct_ACD_ST_TYPEID1104//CDC=ACDFC=ST
#definestruct_SEC_ST_TYPEID1105//CDC=SECFC=ST
#definestruct_BCR_ST_TYPEID1106//CDC=BCRFC=ST
#definestruct_MV_MX_TYPEID1107//CDC=MVFC=MX
#definestruct_CMV_MX_TYPEID1108//CDC=CMVFC=MX
#definestruct_SAV_MX_TYPEID1109//CDC=SAVFC=MX
#definestruct_HMV_MX_TYPEID1110//CDC=HMVFC=MX
#definestruct_HWYE_MX_TYPEID1111//CDC=HWYEFC=MX
#definestruct_HDEL_MX_TYPEID1112//CDC=HDELFC=MX
#definestruct_SPC_ST_TYPEID1113//CDC=SPCFC=ST
#definestruct_DPC_ST_TYPEID1114//CDC=DPCFC=ST
#definestruct_INC_ST_TYPEID1115//CDC=INCFC=ST
#definestruct_BSC_ST_TYPEID1116//CDC=BSCFC=ST
#definestruct_ISC_ST_TYPEID1117//CDC=ISCFC=ST
#definestruct_APC_MX_TYPEID1118//CDC=APCFC=MX
13. network number with " subnet ID "

14. control control block name block name

15. control block type represents the type of control blocks, there are the following types:

//Controller type macro definitions to distinguish different controllers

#defineSGCB_TYPEID0// Fixed value controller

#defineBRCB_TYPEID1// Buffered report controller

#defineURCB_TYPEID2// Unbuffered report controller

#defineLCB_TYPEID3// Record the controller

#defineGOOSECB_TYPEID4//GOOSE Controller

#defineGSSECB_TYPEID5//GSSE Controller

#defineMSVCB_TYPEID6//MSV Controller

#defineUSVCB_TYPEID7//USV Controller

16. variable domain name with the " domain name "

17. variable road named " pathname "

18. control attribute represents the properties specific to the control block, decided by the project

19. set trigger trigger settings that represent the control block, decided by the project

20. total calling time cycles that represent the control block trigger time, determined by the project

21. Server_cfg_xxx..Ini # poll the data set definition, by the engineering needed to decide

22. the "#" symbol indicates that the current line is a comment line.

23. the "@" symbol indicates that the current line is the end line.

Files need to be modified according to the parameters of the system including:

Delay time, this parameter represents the delay time you reconnect to the network. Such as delay time is 60, it means that the
network is disconnected after 60 seconds to reconnect. General settings for 120.

Server files need to be modified according to the project's parameters include:

Poll poll time defined data set, said after polling a set time for the data set.
Control block attribute of the control block, control block that contains specific content, 16 Hexadecimal integer 0x** A total of 16 ,
In which low 9 Effective, " 1 " Enabling," 0 " To cancel, you are defined as follows
Table 6 1

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

Serial Data set

Reservation Time scale Reason Data path Overflow Entrance ID
number name
A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8

Segmentation Reservation Reservation Reservation Reservation Reservation Reservation Reservation

Control block trigger settings, represents the data sent on the trigger conditions 16 Hexadecimal integer 0x** A total of 8 , In which
low 3 Effective, " 1 " Enabling," 0 " To cancel, you are defined as follows
Table 6 2

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

Reservation Data Quality Data Updated Total

change change update regularly queries

Total call time of the control block, said when the trigger is set for a scheduled update, after the set time, the server-side data
is sent on the initiative.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 111/126
1/10/2017 <br>

The tenth chapter automatic test

Directory

1OVERVIEW
1.1BACKGROUND AND CURRENT STATUS

1.2BASIC IDEA

2TEMPLATE DOCUMENTATION
3REAL-TIME TESTING
4GRAPHICS TEST

1 Overview
Automated test that the range of is CSC2000(V2) Measurement and control aspects of the debugging of substation automation system,
including measuring and controlling devices, screen terminal, monitor real-time database and graph points in the background. Test
program can replace manual automatic test for the above content, and test reports. At this stage, by monitoring real time Simulator
which Wen Lai to the background and graphics test points.

1.1 Background and current status

Monitoring system in factory production and debugging process, you must verify the quality of engineering. Validation includes the
following aspects:

1. monitor host configured on the remote measuring, remote measuring, protection devices and sent on line.

2. monitor host configured on the remote control and measuring and control devices out of the line.

3. Monitor configured on the host protection and protective device to send.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 112/126
1/10/2017 <br>
4. monitor host configured on the cushion of a variety of soft and hard information and device consistency.

The original verification process is done manually, a project officer responsible for the Terminal and the other responsible for
viewing the monitor system response is correct. The validation process will take up the entire monitor works half of the time. If you
can implement automated tests, can save a lot of debugging time, reduce project costs.

The contents of this document covers monitoring and control system from the device terminals to monitor background simulation of
automatic test and from the Panel terminals to devices not included in the design of auto-test.

1.2 Basic idea

Monitoring system of automatic test and focused on the development of the difficulties the test rules, that is, how to determine if
a measuring point monitoring system is configured correctly. Original system did not make the rules, so there can only be done manually.

Manual validation a measuring point is configured correctly, which is based on the measuring points to determine the meaning of
physical quantities. Automatic testing is now required to put physical meaning is extracted as a validation rule.

Background monitoring of production engineering processes as follows:

1 1

After you implement the automated testing, monitoring production processes in the background:

1 2

After you implement the automated testing, adding finishing four remote physical meaning of stage, but automatic testing to replace
manual testing, on the whole, more saving production time.

1.2.1 By physical means for automatic testing

The required data

Meaning a point of physical quantities have the following part or several parts:

Type

The name

Location information

Type and name are the various measuring points are included. And an associated location information is available measuring points,
secondary signals do not need to specify the location of the General information. For name, for example "1011 switch position " signal
type " remote " , " switch ", location information may be " line side isolator switch ". "I base voltage ", type " remote " in the "
voltage ", the location information is "I ". Like "SF6 low alarm ", and"PT line " alarm signal is not required.

1.2.2 Implementation method

Automated tests can be divided into two levels: library automated tests and graphics in real time automated testing.

Real-time automatic measuring principle is relatively simple. The following figure:

1 3

Automatic test of the graphic must be in the live test is completed and on the basis of. We have all kinds of graphic elements is
divided into two parts, and applied a different test methods:

1. device-dependent signal. Below is the graphic realization of automated test schematic.

1 4

And equipment related to the measuring point must be configured with the location of the measuring point information. By the remote
file location information and compare topological location information in the results, judge on the point is correct. Requirements for
each device has unique interval of location information, such as switch, may be divided into "I switch ", and"II knife gate ", and" line-
side isolator switch "And the" master switch ", and" bus to knife switch ", and" lines and knife switch " , and so on.

2. do not have a device associated with the signal.

This signal contains only the meaning of physical type and name, as long as on the graph corresponds to the physical volume name is

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 113/126
1/10/2017 <br>
This signal contains only the meaning of physical type and name, as long as on the graph corresponds to the physical volume name is
correct. As in automatic real time testing, signal names have been verified, so when we were in engineering drawing, out automatically
in real time in the library name, and the corresponding entity together, to guarantee the correctness of this part of the signal to the
point.

1.2.3 Production methods include the physical quantities of the four remote files

There are two methods:

1. manual input method

Engineering staff in accordance with engineering drawings, according to four remote file template, through manual input, forms
include the physical quantity of remote files.

This way can be applied flexibly to different substations of different designs, but with engineering effort is larger.

2.the expanded template library method.

Template library already contains content such as point type and name, now a device measuring point location information needs to be
added in. According to the design drawings, different templates (mostly device). When tested, the validator validated extracts
information from the template gallery.

Inheritance works in this way the original practices and working in smaller.

2 Template documentation
$(CSC2100_HOME)/autotest/data Now open the project .xls Because the files use the macros, you need to set Excel macro security is set
to low, click the menu " Tools "-macro-security, as shown in the following figure.

2 1

Set finished, reopen the project .xls File, as shown in the following figure.

2 2

This file contains both fixed tables: engineering, equipment type and template collection. Behind is a template, a template that
corresponds to a table. Need to enter information in the project table is a device for specific project information. Device name main is
marked, significant device address and the corresponding template, it must be consistent and practical. Template from the dropdown menu
to select the device addresses are 16 binary.

" Collection of device types and templates " interface of the table is as follows:

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 114/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 3

Which device type and template name is a cumulative process. Device type must have a " null ", and if found when there is a new type
of device that can be added here. Template names are listed all the template files in the current file, in the " engineering " is
displayed when you select a template in the list where the content.
A specific template file as shown in the following screen, each point needs to be entered includes name, address, 1 , Address 2 ,
Address 3 , Point type, the corresponding equipment. Where device is the device in the engineering of the point matching. Here you need
to define the specific type of equipment, select in the drop down menu. If there is no associated equipment must be selected " empty "

2 4

The establishment of a new template must be based on existing templates to copy, can't create a new table, as follows:
1 . Select an existing template. Right click in the point table name, as shown in the following figure.

2 5

2 . Click the " move or copy worksheet "appears below.

2 6

3 . Select the " create a copy " or " move to the last " OK. A copy of the original template template appears.

2 7

4 . Modify the name of the new template and fill it according to the actual content of the template content, be careful not to new
template

2 8

5 . In the " device type and template collection " this new template is added to the table names, and establish hyperlinks with
the actual table for later retrieval.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 115/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 9

Working in project table-specific input has been completed, click the button " Four remote file "can produce works with the physical
meaning of remote files.

While in " Collection of device types and templates " form, click the button " device type exported "to generate a project type of
files. In later tests, fully rely on the five files, namely, AnalogData.txt, andControlData.txt, andDigitData.txt, andPlusData.txt
DeviceType.txt

If you are in Unix Systems engineering, in Windows System generated five files, and then copy to the Data Directory.

3 Real-time testing
Real-time test has three programs: atctrl Testing control procedures, atvalid Test validation procedures ,atsim Packet simulation program.
$(CSC2100_HOME)/AutoTest Directory.

Simulation and verification procedures of start packet, and then start the test and control procedures. Select the type you want to
test, and automatically start testing, resulting eventually in tests reported $(CSC2100_HOME)/AutoTest/log Directory. Windows system
under test as shown in the following figure.

3 1

3 2

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 116/126
1/10/2017 <br>

3 3

The resulting test report is shown in the following figure.

3 4

4 Graphics test
$(CSC2100_HOME)/autotest Run graphtest.bat ( Unix Running under graphtest ) Tested in the graphics interface, as shown in the following
figure.

4 1
Graphical test automation on the premise that in the graphics card and the device attribute definition, as shown in the following
figure, in addition to configuration of the measuring point.

4 2

Main test is designed to shape names, for " The main interface .graph " Test graphics, graphical selection test is to test the
selected graphic file, you can multi-select. Choose graphics with more equipment for testing. Measurement type that matches if the
device errors are identified by their red color, selected records, double-click, to eject the graphics, the corresponding device icon
will Flash prompting. As shown in the following figure.

4 3

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 117/126
1/10/2017 <br>

Appendix

Directory

1FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONSFAQ
1.1HOW TO INSTALL A DONGLE?

1.2PRINTER INSTALLATION

1.3HOW TO USE THEINOUTCOMMAND?

1.4WHY USEINOUTBACKUP DATA FOLDERS ON THE DESKTOP WHEN BACKUP FAILS?

1.5IF THE SPECIFIED IMPORT DIRECTORY IS EMPTY,INOUTCOMMAND WHETHER THE COMMERCIAL LIBRARY WILL BE EMPTY?

1.6INOUTREAL-TIME OUTPUT DATA FILE YOU CAN IMPORT?

1.7WHY SOMETIMES THE DATA EXPORT WAS NOT SUCCESSFUL (DATABASE,SQLSERVER)?

1.8WHYPOSTGRESDATABASE JOINS UP, IT IS CONNECTED TO?

1.9WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEENTXTFILE FORMAT IS A COMMERCIAL GALLERY EXPORT OR EXPORT IN REAL TIME?

1.10HOW TO BUILD A VIRTUAL HOST COMMUNICATION?

1.11VIRTUAL DEVICE COMMUNICATION HOW DO NOT CORRESPOND TO THE ACTUAL STATE OF?

1.123839CODING TABLE SMALL TABLE PROBLEM

1.13UPGRADE PROCEDURES AND METHODS

1.14DUAL VIDEO CARDS HOW TO SET

1.15UNIXHOST EXCEPTION HANDLING

1.16COMMON USAGE OF THE COMMAND

2UNIXSYSTEM COMMAND
2.1CONSOLE LAUNCH:

2.2ADMINTOOLCOMMAND:

2.3BASHCOMMAND:

2.4CDCOMMAND:

2.5CHMODCOMMAND:

2.6CHOWNCOMMAND:

2.7CPCOMMAND:

2.8DATECOMMAND:

2.9EJECTCOMMAND:

2.10FSCKCOMMAND:

2.11FTPCOMMAND:

2.12KILLCOMMAND:

2.13LSCOMMAND

2.14MANCOMMAND:

2.15MKDIRCOMMAND:

2.16MV COMMAND:

2.17PS COMMAND:

2.18POWEROFFCOMMAND:

2.19PWD COMMAND:

2.20REBOOTCOMMAND:

2.21RM COMMAND:

2.22RMDIR COMMAND:

2.23SU COMMAND :

2.24VI COMMAND:

2.25ZIP/UNZIP COMMANDS:

2.26PASSWD:

3MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM A CUSTOM COMMAND

3.1INOUT

3.2EXPORT: EXPORT THE DEFAULT CONFIGURATION.

3.3SCALE: IMPORT FROM FILE TO LIBRARY AND COMMERCIAL LIBRARIES IN REAL TIME.

4MONITORING NOTICE
5MONITORING REVIEW CONSIDERATIONS

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 118/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 Frequently asked questions FAQ

1.1 How to install a dongle?

V2 Monitoring systems require the installation of dongles. For installation details see: Chapter 4.3.3 software encryption locks
installation

1.2 Printer installation

See also chapter 4.4.1 Setting up the printer.

1.3 How to use the INOUT command?

inout Command is used to import and export to business data. This command supports the file formats are txt and XML. Need to be aware
of is that the txt format file was exported from a commercial database, rather than export in real time. Both formats are not the same.
Now export the command had abandoned the txt format file, but still supports the txt file import feature.

About inout Use command, see the Appendix 3.1 Sections.

1.4 Why use INOUT backup data folders on the desktop when backup fails?

Because inout Command parameters are distinguished by a space and the actual path of the desktop is C:\DocumentsandSettings\ User
name \ Desktop. "DocumentsandSettings" contains a space, causes the command cannot find the required parameters or parameter error.
For example:INOUT1C:\DocumentsandSettings\ username \ desktop \bak, actual INOUT find the path to the folder for
C:\Documentsand subsequent parameters, on a no match because of the wrong type. So the actual result is due to the C:\Documents
required file was not found, so no data was imported into the business.
The backup folder on your desktop, and enter a path with "" Enclosed can be identified.

1.5 If the specified import directory is empty,INOUT command whether the commercial library will be empty?

Will not. INOUT command at the time of import, first read business database table structure, and then the directories specified in
the second parameter to find files that match the name with the table (table name +.XML or .txt) to import. If you cannot find the
present report appropriate file cannot be found, so as to skip the import data for the table. INOUT command can be used to import data
from several tables, table data without affecting the other.

1.6INOUT import real-time output data files?

Can't. The two file formats are not the same, cannot be used. And from V2 Hou INOUT only supports XML file format export .
1.7 Why sometimes the data export was not successful (database, SQLServer) ?

Typically a database connection problem. First of all, to determine whether a database has been started; if it is, use Telnet+IP+
1433 to test whether ports are open. If not, you will need to restart your computer. After the Telnet command to test. If the test does
not pass, you will need to reload the database.

1.8 Why Postgres database joins up, it is connected to?

Do you want to change IP Address? IP address changes required after the pg_hba.conf file in the corresponding binding IP address also
made corresponding changes, and restart the service.

1.9 What is the difference between txt file format is a commercial Gallery export or export in real time?

Difference between the two is the most simple way: the file names are all uppercase or all lowercase (not including extensions). If
it is, then the file was exported from a commercial Gallery; otherwise, is derived from the real-time database.
Note: this assumes that the file is not a commercial library exported is exported in real time. Do not confuse with other files.

1.10 How to build a virtual host communication?

Into the virtual host network communications in the virtual space, named for host name +1Net communication status , Hostname +2Net
communication status System search by naming the corresponding virtual points and maintain state. Host name forSCADA, for example,
deficiency is established called the scada1 network,scada2 network communication status, including virtual points for 0 nodes the network
communication broken, for 1 represents a node of the network communication is normal.

Is in need of attention, host communications is maintained jointly by the primary and backup servers. Under normal circumstances,
maintained by the primary server. In the case of master server was not detected, maintained by the server.
Virtual points and often does not correspond to the actual, because the name does not conform to the naming rules, system searches
the virtual points, not to maintain the communication status of the host. This time we compare the device name and the communication
virtual name. Needs to pay attention in capitalization, spaces, characters, and so on, are exactly the same?

1.11 Virtual device communication and does not correspond to actual state?
Device communication virtual point naming conventions for:
A Deficiency of net communication status: device name + Device address (16 )+comFlagA

B Deficiency of net communication status: device name + Device address (16 )+comFlagB

Dual network communication deficiency: device name + Device address (16 )+comFlag

Virtual point 1 Network communication broken, for 0 Network communication is normal. CSC2000 communication programs by timeout
mechanism to maintain it.
Virtual points and often does not correspond to the actual, because the name does not conform to the naming rules, not to the point
of virtual communication program search, not to maintain the communication status of the device. This time we compare the device name
and the communication virtual name. Needs to pay attention in capitalization, spaces, characters, and so on, are exactly the same?

1.1238 39 Coding table small table problem

At first 2000 Event messages in the Statute as 27 , Will alert 28 , Using a small table models. Through the device type code + event
coding style should be interpreted.
Later, with improvements in the Statute, the original 27 28 Message time scale information is described in simple, no date. 37[
event ], and38[ alarm ], and39[ actions ] Replaced by message. 37 still use small table schema. 38, and39 are designed using the unified table
mode, the code does not differentiate between protection types, uses the unified event coding method to resolve. E series is widely
used. However, the CSC series,38, and39 messages back to the small table schema. And use in the field found in part e series devices, also
a difference from the unified table.
Therefore, for all devices, we recommend using a small table models. That is, code by device type, all events for all devices, alarm
templates work. Of note here is theCSC2000(V2) system alarms and operational information (corresponding to 38, and39) are done in the
warning template, information coding for actual coding +10000 offset. For all events, warnings, and if they do not wish to alarm, can
article in a template library events / alarms are use field
is set to use
. As shown in the following figure. Ordinal as an event code.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 119/126
1/10/2017 <br>

1 1

Finally, modify the traffic profile csccommu.sys Setting site-wide default device using a small table models. Configuration items are
as follows:
#CSCDEVCFG=1
#CSC39DIFF=1

1.13 Upgrade procedures and methods

See also chapter 5 section monitoring and control system upgrades.

1.14 Dual video cards how to set

Current dual-display only SunSparc The schema master. Set double screens display the graphics commands are similar to single, just
needs to use dev parameter specifies the graphics device map file absolute path. Graphics device map file from the/dev directory view, ffb0,

andffb1, or fb0,fb1.

Ultra45 ( XVR500 Graphics card) as an example, the device map file /dev/fb0 /dev/fb1 Set the first piece of graphics commands are:

fbconfig dev/dev/fb0prconf res1280x1024x85

Then reboot the host to take effect. Of course, if conditions do not allow to reboot the host, type the command:
fbconfig dev/dev/fb0prconf res1280x1024x85now

Is in need of attention, now Parameter enables the video settings changes, sometimes causing the host to display exceptions, need to
reboot the host address.

1.15Unix Host exception handling

Unix During operation the host, will encounter freezing of keyboard and mouse stop responding, or abnormal power off, illicit
shutdown, forced shutdown exception from happening. Do not shut down properly, will cause varying degrees of damage to the hardware.
A . " Crash "
UNIX During run time, if keyboard and mouse stop responding, characterized by " Crash
" . On another workstation, via Telnet and
login on this computer. If you can log in, then the workstation only UNIX operating system service exception. In that case, you only
need to restart the host.
Such as abnormal host work1 , IP Address 192.168.10.188 , The steps are as follows:
From another host, create a new console window.
Enter the Telnet192.168.10.188 and hit enter, if a login: prompt, you host to feign death, enter the app return, and any
subsequent password: Prompt enter app (Or app123 ) And a carriage return, landing station.
After the landing station, switch to the root user, use the reboot command to restart exception workstation.
Close the console, switch to the monitor window.
. telnet When you log on, do not appear login: Prompt, then an exception that workstation has stopped responding. Abnormal
workstation only press the power button and restart the failed workstations.
Failure after the workstation starts, login failures workstation, start localm and Desk. Note LocalM starts after that, about
1 minute, and then start the Desk.
B . Disposal of abnormal host reboot
1 . Can automatically enter the UNIX graphical login window
Username app and password (app or app123), enter the UNIX interface.
Open a new console, enter localm, carriage return
Localm completed the program is started (about a minute), and then open a console,
Enter the Deskand return
2 . Stay on the screen waiting for the maintenance of the character interface, there is the following quote
Typecontrol dtoproceedwithnormalstartup
(orgiverootpasswordforsystemmaintenance)
Enter the password 1111,
The # characters appear on the screen, execute the command fscky, carriage return (role: scan hard drives, finishing the
recovery file), the wait command is completed about two minutes (when the screen appears again when the # character indicates
that the program is complete).
Then reboot, enter (role: reboot), if after a reboot of the machine can get UNIX graphical login window, the following
operations with 1 referred to.
Note:
solaris10 Xia, the use of fscky Hou, reboot the host, back to waiting for the maintenance of the character interface. Then we
should use reboot to reboot the host, selected in the boot screen select the Solarisfailsafe( similar to Windows under safe mode ), system
maintenance, We all choose, select Yes . After you restart the host properly.
3 . Screen stay white screen black and xxxerror
This suggests that does not cause damage to the hardware after a normal shutdown, are generally required to replace the hardware
to handle.

1.16 Common usage of the command

See the Appendix 2 Unix System command.

2Unix system command

2.1 Console launch:
CDE Graphic environment, the console starts as shown in the following figure, is in need of attention unix Commands, file names are
case-sensitive.
Also, please note the difference between console and Terminal. From the command window title, we can know the start of the command
window is a console or a Terminal window. Only in the console window, the monitoring system can run.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 120/126
1/10/2017 <br>

2 1

2.2AdminTool command:
admintool Is solaris8/9 Under user management commands, you must root User access. Solaris10 Xia from SMC command instead.

2.3Bash command:
Modify the login shell, which you can use the root directory

2.4CD command:
Change the working directory. Format is as follows
CD[ directory name]

2.5Chmod command:
Change the access permissions for a file or directory. Format is as follows
chmod[R][who][+=][mode] File name ...

chmod[R]mode File name ...

Selected items:
R If the filename specified a directory, modifies the access permissions to all files and subdirectories under the directory

who Can be a combination of one or more of the following letters:

u All the permissions of the file

g Indicates that the file group permissions

o Indicates that the file permissions of other users

a Three permissions for files

+Increasing permissions
To cancel the permission
=Give permission
mode 1 Format, but as a combination of the following letters:
r Read permissions

w Write permissions

x Execute permission

g Set the same permissions as the current set of permissions

l Forcibly blocked access

o Setting permissions for other users the same permissions

s Sets the owner of the file executed ID And group ID As the owner of the file itself ID And group ID

t Setting the sticky bit

u Set the same permissions as the current owner permission

X If the file is a directory, or at least set up an Executive and executive powers. 2 kinds of formats, is an octal number, is
the number of access

2.6Chown command:
Change owner of a file or directory m Number. Format is as follows
Chown[-R]owner[:Group] filename ...
Selected items:
-R filename specified a directory recursively change the directory and all files and subdirectories in this directory owner ID
: Group and group name or group ID, you also change the file's group ID number

2.7CP command :

Copying a group of files. Format is as follows:

cp[option]... Source ... Objective
The options of this command can appear in any order, even behind other parameters:
-A asks the user before copy
-Ad when the directory is found, ask the user whether to use -r logo
-1 as long as you can use a hard link or copy
-M copy all files to modify and access time is reset to the time of the source directory, if there is no -m, sets the last modified
time for replication
-N to prevent overwriting an existing file, requires that the target file is created
-O of each copied file owner and group name as the source of the owner and group names, if not -o, the owner set to call the
program's users
-R recursively list each testing
-S as long as you can use symbolic links. Otherwise copy
-V displays a variety of information
-F If the destination file exists but is not writable, copy before breaking the link
-I interactive copy, before it prompts for confirmation

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 121/126
1/10/2017 <br>
-P the following information to the source file to the destination file: last modified the timing of the visit, the user ID and group
ID, the access permissions of a file
-R recursively copies the file hierarchy
-R ibid. And allow you to copy a device node and named pipes

2.8 Date command:

Display and set the current date and time. Format is as follows:

date[u][format]

date[u][MMDDhhmm[YY]t[CC]YYMMDDhhmm[.SS]]

Selected items:

MM The month (0112)

DD (0131)

hh Hours (0023)

Mm Minutes (0059)

YY After years of two-digit

CC Century (OO99)
SS Seconds (0059)

t Specifies the actual, and seconds

u Local time is Greenwich mean time

+format Display time format specified by the user

dtpad : A text-editing program. Format is as follows

dtpad111.txt

/usr/bin/dtpad// Under the root user permissions

2.9 Eject command:

Pop-up CDROM

2.10fsck Command:
fsck Commands for file system troubleshooting and repair. Format is as follows

fsck[option]

Selected items:

F Specifies the type of file system

m To check the file system, but does not repair

y All queries that appear in the inspection process, a uniform " yes " Answer

n All queries that appear in the inspection process, a uniform " no " Answer

Recommend the use of fscky

2.11ftp Command:
ftp Protocol to transfer files, use and Dos The same.
1. using FTP + the machine's IP address and hit enter;
2. type the user name for this machine app and password app
3. the link is successful, run the bin, converted to binary transmission;
Copy Get, upload using put, for example, put d:\Release.zip or send the source computer d:\Release.zip computer to a target machine that
is being installed

2.12kill Command:
Terminate processes running in the background. Format is as follows:
ki lls signame Process number ...

killl[exit_status]
kill[signame] Process number ...
kill[signumber] Process number ...
Selected items:
ssigname Specifies the signal with a signal name
signame Ditto
signumber Signal specifies the signal

1 List all kill Commands to identify the signal name

lexit_stares() exitstatus Is the exit status of commands executed before, would terminate the commands listed on the signal of the
corresponding process

2.13 Lscommand

List the contents of directories. Format is as follows:

Ls[1ACFLRabcxlfgilmnopqrsmx][WsWv][ directory name files ...]
L[ACFLRabcdfginopqrstu][WsWv][ directory name files ...]
Lc[1AFLRabcdfgilmnopqrstux][WsWv][ directory name files ...]

Lf[1ALRabcdfgilmnopqrsmx][WsWv][ directory name files ...]

Lr[1AFLabcdfgilmnopqrstux][WsWv][ directory name files ...]

Lx[1ACFLRabcdfSilmnopqrstu][WsWv][ directory name files ...]

Selected items:
1 Forced only one file per line

a List all of the accounts. Recorded, including ". " And "...
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 122/126
1/10/2017 <br>
a List all of the accounts. Recorded, including ". " And "...
A Display the full list of the current directory " . " Parent directory "... " Do not display
b Forcing non-graphic characters \Ddd(3 octets ) Display

c t Use the file and directory names are sorted by alphabetically under normal circumstances, becomes a modified order

C Files and directories are displayed in multiple columns

d l Options used to list the contents of status information
f Close 1 t s r Options, open the a Options

F Displays the file or directory name, followed by a specific symbol

*Indicates that the file is an executable file
/Indicates that the name is a directory
@Represents a symbolic link file
Express pipeline files

I 1 Column displays the file or directory i Node number

l Displayed in long format

L Displays information about the symbolic link

m Display output in a coherent format, separated by a comma

n Displayed by the user ID And group ID . Replace the name of the file owner and group

o Displays no files in the output field owner's group

p Add slashes in each directory " / "

q Non-graphic characters forced to appear as characters in the filename " ? "

r Alphabetical reverse order shown

R Traverse directories list

s Noted that each directory number of blocks used by ( Each block is 512 bytes)

t According to file time, dependent on c u Options

u Display, arranged by last access time of the file, and t Use

Ws Similar 1 Option, if it is a symbolic link file, at the end of the show I Node details, both followed by a character " @ "

Wv Similar 1 Option, if this is the beginning of a symbolic link, at the end of the show I Node details, and print out all the path
name of the file in the chain
x To display files and directories can span multiple columns of the page

2.14 Mancommand:

Display reference manual pages and help information for the given command. Format is as follows:
man[af][bcw][ddir][ppager][tproc][Tterm][section]title
manecommand
mankkeyword .
Selected items:
a Display title All of the man pages
b Leave a blank line in the output

c Character formatting

ddir Directory dir Added to the search path

e Display the given command name and short description of the man page

f Display only 1 Matching title

k Find short description of the commands associated with a given keyword

ppager Select the pager pager Display the results, pager more PS cat

tproc Album to hand proc Format

Tterm The given term Value passed to the handler

w Shows only the path name

2.15 Mkdircommand:

Create a directory. Format is as follows:

mkdir[ep][mmode] Directory name ...
Selected items:
e Valid user ID(EUID) And effective group ID(EGID) Place of the new recording of actual users ID(EUID) And the actual group ID(RGID)

P When you create a list, first create a parent directory that does not exist

2.16 MV command:

Moving or renaming a file or directory. Format is as follows:

mv[fi] The source file The destination file
mv[fi] The source file ... The destination directory
Selected items:
f Implementation does not produce a message

i Executive interaction and prompt when

2.17 PS command:

Check the status of running processes in the system. Format is as follows:

ps[option[arguments]...]
ps[edalf][nname][tttys][ppids][uusers][gpgrps]
Selected items:
a In addition to sessionleaders And not the process of with any terminal connected to show all processes
A Display information about each process currently running, equivalent to e Options

d Do not display sessionleaders Process

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 123/126
1/10/2017 <br>
e Is equivalent to the A Options
f Display all process information

ggrplist Display only grplist The specified process information

l Displays process information in long format

nnamename For the currently loaded into memory UNIX Name. This option applies only to a root user ID or the sys Group ID of the user
is valid
oformat Information according to the specified format, a process

pproclist Display proclist The specified process information

tttys Displays the specified Terminal ttys Process information related to the

uuidlist Displays the specified user Uidlist process information related to the

2.18poweroff Command:
Shut down the computer, must be performed under root privileges. Solaris10 Xia, recommend using init5.

2.19 PWd command:

Displays the full path name of the current working directory.

2.20 Rebootcommand:

Restart the computer, you must have root privileges execute. Solaris10 Xia, recommend using init6.

2.21 RM command:

Delete a file or directory. Format is as follows:

rm[firR] File name ...
Selected items:
f Even if the user does not have write permissions to the file, was forced to delete it
i Interactive removal, allow the user to confirm before deleting the file

r Recursively deletes the specified directory and all the contents of the directory itself
R r The same

2.22 Rmdir command:

Delete a directory. Format is as follows:

rmdir[p][s] Directory name
Selected items:
p Deletes the specified directory when its parent directory is empty, also be deleted

s Command execution process, the error message is not displayed on the screen

2.23 Su command :

From a user temporarily to root or another user. Format is as follows

su[name]
name: The user account name, and no users switch to superuser, or root user
General users: operator $ Root user: operator#

2.24 VI command:

Full-screen text editor. Format is as follows:

VI[ filename]
File name If the directory does not specify a file, it creates a new file
Retirement:
:wq Save the file and exit back to the UNIXSHELL State

:q! Does not save the file exit and return to UNIXSHELL State

:ZZ File modifications, save the file and exit back to the UNIXSHELL State
:x :ZZ The same
vi Command uses the more complicated general text editing can be used dtpad Last used vi Open the file, check that the file is
correct.

2.25 Zip/unzip commands:

Compression, decompression tools

Example: zip Rbak.zipbackup( backup Directory packaged as bak.zip file )

2.26Passwd:

Set, change the user's password. In the root user to use the passwd command, you can avoid the password complexity checking links.

Example: passwdapp (Setting app The user's password)

3 Monitoring and control system a custom command

3.1inout

Features: database import and export with the file command. Now defunct export txt file format, supports only XML export format. But
still supports the txt file import feature.

Format:

INOUT[ import ? Export ?][ File path ]< target database>

1 Argument on behalf of importing or exporting data, 1 Import from a file into the database, 0 File exporting from the database

2 Arguments for absolute path to file

3 Parameters for the data source select [ Optional ] , 0 Primary server 1 Server, the default preferred primary server

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 124/126
1/10/2017 <br>
Example:

1 . F:\csc2100_home\data\MoBan file is imported to the master server under

inout1F:\csc2100_home\data\MoBan inout1F:\csc2100_home\data\MoBan0

2 . Export data from the server to the current directory

inout0./1

Notes:

1 . This command can only be used for database and file import/export cannot be used for real-time database and files between
import and export. Because the two file formats and file naming rules are not the same.

2 . The command export file name or all uppercase or all lowercase. And the file named: the table name +.txt.

3 . When importing, the Guide refers to the directory file names consistent with the table name in the database table. On a table
that have no corresponding file does not.

4 . This command is not supported for import and export of historical data. Actually only the scada1and theprotmoduleand
thesystabuser these users, a table and graph user tab_Component_lib table AlarmDefine record. AlarmDefine is a binary file after
export:userInfo.cfg.

3.2Export : export the default configuration.

Feature: export the default configuration. Default settings for different areas (such as alarm color, action sets, users,
permissions, and so on) you can export the command for future standard setting in the area.

Format:

Export[ source ][ target file path]

1 Parameters for the data source select, 0 Primary server 1 Preparing servers

2 Parameters for the absolute path of the export file

Example:

1. export the data from the primary server to F:\csc2100_home\data\ in Beijing area

Export0F:\csc2100_home\data\ In Beijing area

Notes:

1. the exported file should include:ALARM_TABACTION.txt, andALARM_TABCATEGORY.txt, andALARM_TABTYPE.txt, and

Tabusergroup.txt, andtbl_app_properties.txt and userInfo.cfg.

2. you can use INOUT import.

3.3Scale : import from file to library and commercial libraries in real time.
For example, files are stored in F:\databack Directory

Imported into the master server: Scale11F:\databack

Imported to the server: Scale12F:\databack

While imported into the host server: Scale12F:\databack

4 Monitoring notice
1. for the Unix operating system host, must be properly configured host name file:/etc/hosts. Reason: hostname file configuration errors can
cause print service is not working properly.
2. host ping Tong does not necessarily prove the other host network configuration intact , should be based on mutual ping Tong as the
standard. Reason: has encountered an exception at the scene, a host 2 segment IP192.168.20.40,ping 2 segment host can pingWorks, but other
host ping192.168.20.40 failed, finally found the machines ping himself 2 network IP fails.
3. hosts connect laser printers , print servers, can no longer be defined as a real-time alarm print function. Reason: laser printing and
real-time alarms are required for printing to a parallel port, due to an access violation, not print properly.
4. Unix hosts, program TimeSet under the root user, probably because not found libstdc++.so.* and other related dynamic library files, failed
to start. See 2.6.1 contents, modify the /etc/profile file. In addition,timeset proposes to start manually on each node, when each host pair
correctly, close the machine run TimeSet. Reason:UNIX time change error, will cause a host does not display properly, restart the
machine in order to recover.
5. If the monitor backend service console has been repeated reports:AddCurNet:1************DeviceAddr:133 , indicate the address for
133(10 in binary) through two or more IP address to the Ethernet broadcast messages, there are two possible causes: first, more of the
gateway device Lon network series, Such messages are sent through two or more gateways, another scenario is duplicate device address:
judgment device address repeated approaches: the corresponding address of the device loses power or disconnected from the network, if
the backend reporting device communications break, then the proof is not an address repeated, otherwise it is a serious problem, you
need to track duplicate device.
6. remote volume after the modification in remote, will write, can send a remote signal modification alarm, but SOE and the logic is
somewhat different,SOE sent messages on state variables and variable symbol, the Statute by SOE Modification determines SOE alarm.
7. after the report is completed, you need to sync on each node, used for engineering staff, but before the synchronization, ensure that
report did not start other nodes, most insurance operation, is close to other nodes Desk, after synchronization, restart the other
nodes Desk.
8. PDR will trigger time into seconds, stored as a keyword, so when two PDR occurs in 1 Second, the latter a PDR storage failed. The
console reports PDRsavefailed,constraintviolated information, ignore it.
9. modify the template library to be modified on the host, if you have modified the protection, warning, you need to select a template
library import library in real time . Also note that, no matter what the modified template library data, if the other nodes running
on the Desk had been running template management, then restart the other nodes after you finish modifying the Desk.
10. only modify the configuration data in the form on the right side of the tool, just click on the Save button at the top of other
operations, delete the renamed as interval, interval, interval, matching, by using the Properties dialog box to modify the four
remote properties, do not need to click the Save button.
11. SCADA built libraries, not in four remote points, intervals, station name," "Reason: real-time text, separated by a comma
as a special character. Named using a comma will cause dysfunction such as real-time text import.
Also note, four remote points name has a maximum length, not too long. Not only limited by the system, is not easy for the user
to see.
Remote name limit: 80 Byte, taking account of the need to ' \0 ' A location efficient bytes 79 , The same below.
Telemetry named upper limit: 80 Bytes.
Remote pulse named upper limit: 84 Bytes.
Remote control named ceiling: name 60 Byte, double number 20 Bytes.
12. Note that only shared memory in real time, power will be empty. If, after changes in real time, no import business operations in real
time. After the host is restarted, still reads the original library in real time from commercial libraries. So when we make effective
file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 125/126
1/10/2017 <br>
time. After the host is restarted, still reads the original library in real time from commercial libraries. So when we make effective
changes (effective changes including: Configuration tool to modify in real time and change on the main interface device), note that by
closing the Configuration tool save the commercial option or desktop when -started application module Database management
-
Backing up data real-time library import business in real-time database backup options.
13. equipment is part of the real-time database. Equipment modifications, automatic synchronization of each node. But also to save to a
commercial gallery, permanent. This we graphic editor, easily ignored when the associated equipment. Graphics editing, we tend to pay
attention to when saving graphics files and synchronize graphics files to each node shape files are consistent. But ignores the
associated with equipment changes , if it is not saved in the business library, the host reboot will result in loss of associated
equipment we do work.
14.the main purpose of fault location equipment management tools and so on. Engineering construction, apart from the voltage increase
needed to use it, and do not need to use device management tools for equipment additions and deletions . Graphics editing this part
has been blocked.
15. for a dual-screen workstations, for system reasons and graphics synchronization, you need to restart the Desk, all figure on the
double screen to come into force. It may have dual-display inconsistencies, such as total protection event etc.
16. UNIX use directories, must be in the UNIX compress. If Windows is uncompressed, compressed,UNIX is not under normal use.
17. Unix host table at the export movement under way:
a. yd.zip Copied to the workstation and unzip into the ./yd Directory;
b.With interface data backup procedures, implementing real-time database export to a file and directory selection./yd/RT
c.Execute the commandchmod+xexpYD
d.Execute the command expYD , It will ./yd Directory generated Analog.txt Digit.txt Relay.txt , Respectively, remote control, remote
telemetry table table table.

5 Monitoring review considerations

1. each node can ping through node ping I can ping Tong. Host name and network IP addresses are required to test.
2. Management displays the node by node status feature, looking at its host network connection is normal.
3. is configured correctly on each node in the node management, applications are configured correctly.
4. check all nodes that are configured on the application will start automatically, exit the alarm has no reporting process.
5. user management users group permissions configured according to user's demands.
6. program Leng Bei, hot-spare function is normal.
7. opened into the program on the primary and backup nodes, must test into the open function is normal, electric flute Bell can be
driven, not just test a node. Five for mutual interface program, have to be tested.
8. automatic expansion of history, whether the proper access to the main historical and each host service.
9.the historical alarm alarm can pass a query query and report whether the query history.
10. Configuration tool history data table is complete. If statistics voltage, check whether the voltage table is complete.
11. works at the end of project filescsc2100_home directories and libraries, template libraries properly backed up in real time.
Recommended backup format , in the /export/home/app Directory to build a backup the home directory, in the backup directory, YYYYMMDD
date format set up backup subdirectory on the day. Csc2100_home Directory and compress files.
12. by browsing and graphics in real time to see if there is no remote signaling, remote points is still the manual States, avoid this
debugging state.
13. project should be at the end of the user requirements, modify reports, graphics and so on, all nodes are synchronized.
14. monitoring before delivery of the user, each node screen to cancel.
15. monitoring prior to delivery to the customer use, stable operation for more than a day, and observation system for anomalies, such as
the process exit, test the monitoring functions are normal.
16.the project at the end of the built-in user logs off from the Quartet, and restore the user state of normal substations.

file:///C:/Users/dell59/AppData/Local/Microsoft/Windows/INetCache/Content.MSO/DBD1ECBB.html 126/126